Renesource Capital FX Professional User Guide

Transcription

1

2 Copyright Integral Development Corp. All rights reserved Hillview Avenue, Building 4 Palo Alto, CA United States of America Tel: +1 (650) This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting, without limitation, its use, reproduction, copying, No part of this product or related documentation may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of an authorized officer of Integral Development Corp. The following are the trademarks of Integral Development Corp: Integral FX Inside Integral FX Trader Integral Direct Derivatives Integral Rates Manager Integral Pricing Engine FinXML Integral Direct FX Integral OrderBook Integral FX Grid is a registered trademark of Integral Development Corp. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation ( All other designated trademarks are the property of their respective owners. This document is subject to change without notice. Saturday, April 13, 2013

3 Contents Foreword 14 About This Document 14 Audience for This Document 14 Typographic Conventions 14 System Requirements 15 Contacting Support 16 What s New in Renesource Capital FX Professional 16 Welcome to Renesource Capital FX Professional Introduction What s New Starting Renesource Capital FX Professional Passwords and Security Static Password One-Time Password (OTP) Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) Configuring the Security Scheme Working with Static Passwords 19 Changing Your Static Password 20 Static Password Guidelines 21 Forgotten Passwords 21 Changing Your Secret Question and Answer 22 Guidelines for Secret Questions and Answers 23 Changing Your Address Logging Out of Renesource Capital FX Professional 24 Trading Introduction Taking Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) Intrafloor Prices Taking Prices from the FX Board Module 27 Using the Mouse To Take Prices 27 Using the Keyboard To Take Prices 28

4 Taking Prices from the Full Book Module 28 Using the Mouse To Take Prices 28 Using the Keyboard To Take Prices Trading ESP from the Sales Dealer Module Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices Trading from the RFS Module 30 RFS Spot 30 Outright 31 NDF 32 Swap Trading from the RFS Full Book Module 34 RFS Spot 34 Outright 35 NDF 35 Swap Trading RFS from the Sales Dealer Module 37 RFS Spot 38 Outright 38 NDF 39 Swap Submitting an Order Submitting an Order from the Orders Module 42 Limit Orders 42 Market and Market Range Orders 43 Stop Orders Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules Copying Orders Submitting Linked Orders Linking an Active Order to a New Order Pips Validation Order Submission Examples Stop Order: Bid with Bid Trigger Rate 49 Initial Book 49 Order Submission 50 Order Execution Stop Order: Bid with Offer Trigger Rate 51 Initial Book 51 Order Submission 51 Order Execution 52

5 Stop Order: Offer with Offer Trigger 52 Initial Book 52 Order Submission 53 Order Execution Stop Order: Offer with Bid Trigger 54 Initial Book 54 Order Submission 54 Order Execution Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) Request for Stream (RFS) ESP and RFS Compared Entering Amounts Entering Decimal Amounts Unit Shortcuts Assuming the Unit Shortcut for Currencies Entering Amounts and Maximum Order Size Entering Dates and Tenors Tenors Entering Tenors for Swaps in the RFS Module Tenor Shortcuts for Overnights and Tomorrow Next Swaps Broken Dates Volatile Market Trading Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account 62 Monitoring Trading Activity Introduction The Done Trades Blotter Working with Trades and Trade Tickets Analyzing Trade Data Configuring the Done Trades Blotter Calculating the Net Position and Average Price for a Currency Pair Viewing Trade Tickets Printing Trade Tickets Viewing a Trade s History Viewing a Market Snapshot Rebooking Outstanding Trades The Orders Blotter Using the Blotter 69

6 Analyzing Order Data Configuring the Orders Blotter Viewing Order Summaries Viewing an Order s History Printing Order Summaries Show Orders by Status Draft and Imported Orders 72 Importing Orders 72 Activating Draft Orders 73 Editing Draft Orders 73 Exporting Draft Orders 74 File Format for Importing and Exporting Orders 75 Header 75 Empty Fields 75 Extra Data 75 Fields 76 Examples 77 Removing Draft Orders The Positions Blotter Working with Positions Configuring the Positions Blotter Viewing Positions in the Blotter 79 Time Periods and Trade Dates for Positions 79 Grouping Trades into Positions 80 Summary View 80 Trades View 82 Delta View 84 Counterparty View 86 Trader View 88 Account View 90 Organization View Covering Your Open Positions Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions Rolling Your Open Positions Starting a New Session in the Positions Blotter The Messages Blotter Working with Messages Configuring the Messages Blotter The Exceptions Blotter 98

7 Working with Exceptions Configuring the Exceptions Blotter Minimizing/Restoring the Blotter Module and Showing Hidden Blotter Tools The Account Details Module Module Data Account Calculations Generating Trade Reports Generating a Report of Blotter Items Refreshing the Blotters Printing Blotter Items Spot Mark-to-Market Profit/Loss Display Configuring Calculating Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Blotter Data Searching Blotter Contents Filtering Blotter Contents by Column Sorting Blotter Contents Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File 105 Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Introduction Configuring Trading Preferences for a Currency Pair Default Settings General Defaults Trading Defaults RFS Defaults Advanced Orders Defaults Blotter Defaults Notifications Defaults General Settings Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) Configuring Screen Locking Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency Reverting to Default Sizes on Price Taking or Order Entry Enabling Automatic Unit Shortcuts Showing Price Movement Indicators 111

8 Show the Spread at the Top of the Book in the Trading Modules Show Prices with Zero Size Show the Value Date of Prices Including Execution Range in Prices Display Automatically Printing Trade Tickets Being Notified of Active Orders When You Exit Trading Settings Execution Types Described Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) 115 VWAP Execution 115 VWAP Price Display and Workflow VWAP Price-Taking Examples Aggregate Prices Multi-Tier Quotes Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules Setting the Volatile Market Multiplier Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules Setting the Number of Prices in the Full Book and RFS Full Book Modules Filtering Price Sizes from the FX Board and Full Book Modules Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules Setting the Default Size for the Orders Module Setting the Default Display Size for Orders Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market RFS Settings Setting Default Tenors for Outright and Swap RFS Setting Default Tenors for Rolling Positions Setting the Default RFS Expiry Time Managing RFS Liquidity Providers 127 Add/Remove RFS Liquidity Providers for a Currency Pair 128 Set RFS Provider Priority To Break Ties Advanced Orders Settings Hiding/Showing Order Entry Docking the Orders Module Setting Price Ranking Order in Case of a Tie Preventing Off-Market Order Entry 130

9 Canceling All Limit Orders Clearing Inactive Orders Automatically Activating the Orders Module When You Submit Orders in Other Modules Quick Orders Settings Showing and Hiding the Quick Order Buttons Choosing How the Quick Order Buttons Are Displayed Configuring Quick Order Time-in-Force Configuring the Pips Increment of the Quick Order Buttons Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Currency Pair 134 Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair 135 Adding a Liquidity Provider from the Settings Window 135 Adding a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules 135 Removing a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair 136 Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Settings Window 136 Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Liquidity Provider 137 Adding a Currency Pair to a Liquidity Provider 137 Removing a Currency Pair from a Liquidity Provider 138 Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie 138 Adding New Liquidity Providers to Currency Pairs Automatically Showing Your Own Orders as Intrafloor Prices Blotter Settings Keeping Track of Trades and Messages 142 Configuring Trade and Message Tracking 143 Marking Items as Read Manually 143 Marking Items as Read Automatically Configuring Blotter Columns 144 Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter 144 Adding Blotter Columns 145 Removing Blotter Columns 145 Arranging Blotter Columns Requiring Confirmation for Covering Positions Choosing the Behavior of the Positions Blotter When the Trade Date Rolls Choosing the Order Type for Covering Positions Put Focus Automatically on New Outstanding Trades Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Network Connectivity Trading Server Proxy Server 148

10 Configuring Trading Notifications Trade Notifications Order Notifications Show Only Customer Trade Notifications 150 The Renesource Capital FX Professional User Interface Introduction Essential Renesource Capital FX Professional Functionality Trading Modules The FX Board Module 154 Prices Display 155 Link to Full Book, Orders, and RFS Modules 155 Opening Full Book Modules 155 FX Board Module Components 155 Take Price Buttons in the FX Board Module 158 Adding Currency Pairs to the FX Board Module 158 Removing Currency Pairs from the FX Board Module 158 Resizing the FX Board Module The Full Book Module 160 Link to FX Board Module 160 Opening Multiple Full Book Modules 160 Full Book Module Components 161 Take Price Buttons in the Full Book Module 163 Aggregating Prices in the Full Book Module 163 Resizing the Full Book Module Quick Order Buttons Described 165 Quick Order Buttons as Drop-down Lists 165 Quick Order Buttons as Button Groups The Orders Module 168 Orders Module Components 169 Canceling Orders 173 Canceling All Orders 173 Canceling Individual Orders 173 Clearing Filled and Cancelled Orders 173 Amending Orders 174 Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace 174 Amending Orders by Price and Size 177 Suspending and Resuming Orders 179 Suspending and Resuming All Orders 179

11 11 Suspending and Resuming a Specific Order 179 Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders 180 Orders Overview 180 Order Characteristics 181 Order Types 181 Order Persistence 183 Order Trigger Types 183 Time in Force 184 Displayed and Hidden Orders 185 Displayed and Hidden Orders Compared 186 Setting Up Relationships for Displayed Orders 186 Displayed Orders Behavior 186 Linked Orders 187 Contingency Types 187 Submitting Linked Orders 187 Take Profit/Stop Loss (TP/SL) Orders 187 Limit Orders 188 Market Orders 188 Stop Orders The Advanced Orders Module 189 Advanced Orders Module Components 190 Cancelling Linked Orders 193 Cancelling an Individual Component Order 193 Cancelling All Orders of a Linked Order Chain The Sales Dealer Module 195 Sales Dealer Module Components (ESP) 197 Sales Dealer Module Components (RFS) 199 Sales Dealer Module Keyboard Shortcuts The RFS Module 202 RFS Module Components The RFS Full Book Module 206 Link to RFS Module 206 Opening Multiple RFS Full Book Modules 207 Managing RFS Full Book Modules 207 Sorting Prices 207 RFS Full Book Module Components 207 Take Price Buttons in the RFS Full Book Module 210 Sorting Prices in the RFS Full Book Module 210 Showing the Full Book in the RFS Full Book Module 211

12 Blotter Module Components Done Trades Blotter Columns Trade Ticket Data 214 Spot: ESP 214 Spot: RFS 215 Outright 216 Swap 217 NDF Orders Blotter Columns Order Summary Data Positions Blotter Columns Messages Blotter Columns Messages Blotter Font Colors Exceptions Blotter Columns Common Tools and Tasks Trading Screen Layouts Locking the Trading Screen Disabling the Trading Screen Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen Bringing All Detached Modules to the Front Application Focus Price Movement Indicators Toolbar Status Bar Connectivity Status 230 Status Indicators 230 Indicator Colors Renesource Capital FX Professional Keyboard Shortcuts FX Board Module Keyboard Shortcuts Full Book Module Keyboard Shortcuts RFS Module Keyboard Shortcuts RFS Full Book Module Keyboard Shortcuts Done Trades Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts Orders Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts Positions Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts Messages Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts Exceptions Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts 234

13 13 Using the Online Help Introduction Using the Table of Contents Using the Full-Text Search Root Word Searches Search Operators 236 Or 236 And 236 Exclusion Using the Index How the Help System Is Organized Online Help Conventions Type Styles Navigation Notes, Tips, Cautions, and Important Terminology Keyboard Shortcut Conventions 238 Glossary 239 A.1 Glossary 239 A.1.1 CSV 239 A.1.2 legal entity 239 A.1.3 display size 239

14 Foreword Welcome to Renesource Capital FX Professional, a Windows-based.NET application that aggregates foreign exchange rates so you can execute the best trade available. About This Document This document describes how to trade with Renesource Capital FX Professional and how to configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to optimize and customize your trading experience. Also, this guide details the concepts that drive Renesource Capital FX Professional functionality. This guide is organized into the following chapters: Welcome to Renesource Capital FX Professional on page 17 Trading on page 26 Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64 Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional on page 106 The Renesource Capital FX Professional User Interface on page 152 Using the Online Help on page 235 Glossary on page 239 Starting/stopping the application, changing your static password Taking prices and submitting orders Analyzing your trading activity and positions, generating reports Customizing Renesource Capital FX Professional to meet your specific needs and preferences Detailed explanation of all aspects of the Renesource Capital FX Professional user interface How to get the information you need from the Renesource Capital FX Professional online help Domain- and application-specific terms Audience for This Document This guide contains information for traders using Renesource Capital FX Professional. Typographic Conventions This document uses various formats to make its usage simple and easy. The following table lists the conventions used in this document: Italic Emphasize a term or concept Introduce new terms. For example, system monitoring. Bold User-interface elements. For example, File menu.

15 System Requirements 15 Sans Serif Names of classes, instances, messages, and examples of code. For example, Counterparty. Filenames, pathnames, commands, and other operating-system constructs. For example, /cust/usr. Italic Sans Serif Blue color ItalicNameRoot/bin/util/ data='test' Variable elements for which you must substitute a value. For example, filename.java. URLs and cross-references that you can click when viewing the document online. For example, Typographic Conventions on page 7. Root path references. For example, ProductRoot (to refer to the root path /cust/usr/application) In file names, a directory name that ends with Root is a variable that represents a root path. To clarify that it is a variable and not an actual path name, the name appears in italics. References to elements in an XML doc are made using XPath conventions. The example reads: The example element with a data attribute value of 'test' in the xmlstructure in the root element. The XML equivalent would be: <root> <xmlstructure> <example data="test"/> </xmlstructure> </root> System Requirements Network Connectivity Minimum 128 Kbps connection Recommended Fractional T1 (512 Kbps) Hardware Minimum Pentium III 600 MHz processor with 1 GB RAM Operating System Display Settings Recommended Pentium III 1.0 GHz processor (or faster) with 2 GB RAM (or higher) Supported Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP (SP3) Required Your display must be set to 96 DPI. For information about how to configure your display, search for the keywords increase decrease DPI in your operating system s online help. Software Required Microsoft.NET Framework (FX Inside is available for download with or without the.net Framework. Windows administrator privileges are required to install.net.)

16 Contacting Support 16 Contacting Support Please refer to the Business Support contact information in the Renesource Capital FX Professional application (Help > Contact Support). What s New in Renesource Capital FX Professional This guide introduces the new features in this release of Renesource Capital FX Professional and provides links where appropriate for more information. The Done Trades blotter has been enhanced to allow you to click and drag in the blotter to select trades for position calculation. Also, the Include New Trades checkbox has been added so that you can include incoming trades in the net position/average price display. See item 7 in Blotter Module Components on page 211 and Step 1 of Showing net position/average price for specific trades on page 66 in Calculating the Net Position and Average Price for a Currency Pair on page 66. The expiry counter in the RFS Full Book module has been moved. See RFS Full Book Module Components on page 207. When you trade from the Full Book module, sweep execution is used when you configure either the VWAP/Sweep or Sweep execution strategy. Renesource Capital FX Professional sweeps the market from the top of the book to the price that you clicked. See Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules on page 119 and Taking Prices from the Full Book Module on page 28. The buttons that you use to take prices in RFS trading modules have been updated to appear more like the top-of-book buttons in the ESP trading modules: o RFS Module Components on page 203 o Sales Dealer Module Components (RFS) on page 199 o Sales Dealer Module Components (ESP) on page 197 A new Material Economic Terms link in RFS trading modules opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system: o RFS Module Components on page 203 (see item 19 ) o RFS Full Book Module Components on page 207 (see item 12 ) o Sales Dealer Module Components (RFS) on page 199 (see item 19 ) All-in mid mark prices have been added to the take-price buttons in RFS trading modules: o RFS Module Components on page 203 (see item 13 ) o RFS Full Book Module Components on page 207 (see item 15 ) o Sales Dealer Module Components (RFS) on page 199 (see item 14 )

17 Welcome to Renesource Capital FX Professional 1.1 Introduction NOTE: If you want to start trading as quickly as possible, see Taking Prices from the FX Board Module on page 27. Renesource Capital FX Professional is a Windows-based application that makes it easy to organize and manage your FX trading so that you can execute the best trade available. Sophisticated ordermatching logic and powerful configuration settings give you complete control over your trading activity. The Renesource Capital FX Professional online help provides detailed information on Renesource Capital FX Professional features and components: The Renesource Capital FX Professional User Interface on page 152 Essential Renesource Capital FX Professional Functionality on page What s New For a quick introduction to the new features in this release, see What s New in Renesource Capital FX Professional on page Starting Renesource Capital FX Professional To start Renesource Capital FX Professional: 1. Select Start > Programs > Renesource Capital FX Professional > Renesource Capital FX Professional or double-click the Renesource Capital FX Professional icon on your desktop. The Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window appears. 2. In the Organization field, enter your organization s name. 3. Enter your user ID in the User Name. 4. Enter your security details in the appropriate fields. 5. Click Login. If you are logging in for the first time or if the license agreement has changed, the License Agreement Viewer window opens. You must scroll to the bottom of the agreement and click Click to esign to continue to Renesource Capital FX Professional. NOTE: You must scroll to the bottom of the agreement text to activate the Click to esign button.

18 1.4 Passwords and Security 18 If you have forgotten your password, click the Forgot your password? link. The link is only active if your security scheme includes a static password. See Forgotten Passwords on page 21 for what to do if you forget your password. See Passwords and Security on page 18 for more information about security schemes. CAUTION: Clicking the Settings button in the login window displays the Renesource Capital FX Professional - Connectivity Details window, which allows you to configure the network connectivity parameters for your Renesource Capital FX Professional installation. Do not change these parameters without first consulting your network administrator. Doing so may disrupt your connection to the FX Grid and leave you unable to trade. See Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Network Connectivity on page 147 for details. 1.4 Passwords and Security You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to conform to your organization s security policies by choosing from the following the security schemes: Static Password on page 18 One-Time Password (OTP) on page 18 Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) on page 18 For information about how to configure security schemes, see Configuring the Security Scheme on page Static Password In the static password security scheme, you have a single password that remains the same from trading session to trading session. You may be required to change your password on a regular basis depending on your organization s security policies. The first time you log in to Renesource Capital FX Professional, you must choose a new password and a secret question/answer that you can use if you forget your password. For more information about static passwords, see Working with Static Passwords on page One-Time Password (OTP) In the one-time password security scheme, you use a different password for every trading session. Each password is valid only for one trading session. Your organization should have an established process for generating and distributing one-time passwords Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) The two-factor authentication scheme combines both static password and OTP, requiring that you enter both a static password as well as a unique password for every trading session. You may be required to change your static password on a regular basis depending on your organization s security policies. The one-time passwords are valid only for one trading session. Your organization should have an established process for generating and distributing one-time passwords.

19 1.4 Passwords and Security 19 The first time you log in to Renesource Capital FX Professional, you must choose a new static password and a secret question/answer that you can use if you forget your password. For more information about static passwords, see Working with Static Passwords on page Configuring the Security Scheme You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to conform to your organization s security policies by choosing a security scheme. For more information about the various security schemes, see Passwords and Security on page 18. NOTE: You change the security scheme only from the Connection Settings window that you access from the Renesource Capital FX Professional login window. To change the security scheme enforced by Renesource Capital FX Professional: 1. Open the Login window by doing one of the following: o Starting Renesource Capital FX Professional o Logging out of Renesource Capital FX Professional (File > Logout) The Login window opens. 2. Click the Settings... button. The Connection Settings window opens. 3. Click the option button of the security scheme that you want to enable: o Static Password: a single password that remains the same from trading session to trading session. Renesource Capital FX Professional provides tools for changing and recovering your password. o One-Time Password: a unique password for every trading session o 2-Factor Authentication: both a static password and a one-time password 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Working with Static Passwords The following guidelines and procedures apply only if you configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to enforce the static password or two-factor authentication security schemes. Changing Your Static Password on page 20 Static Password Guidelines on page 21 Forgotten Passwords on page 21 Changing Your Secret Question and Answer on page 22 Guidelines for Secret Questions and Answers on page 23 Changing Your Address on page 23 For information about how to configure security schemes, see Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19.

20 1.4 Passwords and Security 20 Changing Your Static Password NOTE: This procedure only applies if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional for the static password or two-factor authentication security scheme. See Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19. You should change your password regularly to ensure the integrity of your Renesource Capital FX Professional account. When you change your password, you can also change the secret question and answer that you use if you forget your password, and the address where Renesource Capital FX Professional delivers the new password. See Changing Your Secret Question and Answer on page 22 and Changing Your Address on page 23 for more information. To change your password: 1. Select Tools > Password Maintenance. The Password Maintenance window opens. Figure 1-1 Password Maintenance Window 2. Enter your current password in the Password field and click Submit. The Password Maintenance window opens with your security details. Figure 1-2 Password Maintenance Window with Security Details 3. Enter your new password in the New Password field.

21 1.4 Passwords and Security Confirm your new password by entering it in the Retype New Password field. 5. Click Submit. Static Password Guidelines NOTE: This information only applies if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional for the static password or two-factor authentication security scheme. See Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19. For security purposes, the static password you choose must: Be a minimum of six (6) characters long. Not contain your user ID or any part of your full name. Have no leading or trailing spaces. Contain no more than two consecutive, identical characters. Contain characters from at least three (3) of the following classes of characters: o English uppercase letters, such as A, B, C,, Z. o English lowercase letters, such as a, b, c,, z. o Westernized Arabic numerals, such as 0, 1, 2,, 9. o Non-alphanumeric special characters, such!,?,., and *. Renesource Capital FX Professional will not allow you to use a password that does not meet these minimum requirements. Examples of invalid passwords: bumblebee Enough characters, but not enough character classes (only lower-case letters) rq1z Enough character classes (lower-case, upper-case, and numbers), but not enough characters goooteam! Enough character classes (lower-case, upper-case, and non-alphanumeric characters), enough characters, but too many consecutive, identical characters ( ooo ) Examples of valid passwords: nmbr1to Enough characters and at least three character classes (lower-case, upper-case, and numbers) Adwwlii! Enough characters and at least three character classes (lower-case, upper-case, and non-alphanumeric characters) Forgotten Passwords NOTE: This procedure only applies if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional for the static password or two-factor authentication security scheme. See Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19. If you forget your password, you can request that Renesource Capital FX Professional send you a new password. After answering a secret question, Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your new password to your account s address. See Changing Your Secret Question and Answer on page 22 and

22 1.4 Passwords and Security 22 Changing Your Address on page 23 for information about setting your secret question/answer and address. To receive a new password via 1. Start Renesource Capital FX Professional. See Starting Renesource Capital FX Professional on page 17 for details. 2. Enter your organization ID in the Organization field. 3. Enter your user name in the User Name field. 4. Click the Forgot your password? link in the log-in window. The log-in window displays your secret question. 5. Enter the answer to your question in the Secret Answer field. 6. Click Submit. You should receive your new password shortly via . The next time you log in to Renesource Capital FX Professional, you must change your password for security reasons. See Static Password Guidelines on page 21 for information about choosing a new password. Changing Your Secret Question and Answer NOTE: This procedure only applies if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional for the static password or two-factor authentication security scheme. See Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19. If you forget your password, Renesource Capital FX Professional sends you a new password after you successfully answer a secret question. You can change your secret question and answer at any time. To change your secret question and answer: 1. Select Tools > Password Maintenance. The Password Maintenance window opens. Figure 1-1 Password Maintenance Window 2. Enter your current password in the Password field and click Submit. The Password Maintenance window opens with your security details.

23 1.4 Passwords and Security 23 Figure 1-2 Password Maintenance Window with Security Details 3. Enter a question whose answer only you know in the Secret Question field. You must answer this question if you forget your password. 4. Enter the answer to your secret question in the Secret Answer field. This is the answer you must submit to obtain a new password if you forget your password. 5. Click Submit. Guidelines for Secret Questions and Answers NOTE: This information only applies if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional for the static password or two-factor authentication security scheme. See Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19. When you first log in to Renesource Capital FX Professional, you must enter a secret question to answer if you forget your password so that Renesource Capital FX Professional can send you a new password. Make sure that the answer to your secret question is something known only to you and that cannot be worked out or inferred from the question. You can change your secret question and answer as often as you like. See Changing Your Secret Question and Answer on page 22. Changing Your Address NOTE: This procedure only applies if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional for the static password or two-factor authentication security scheme. See Configuring the Security Scheme on page 19. If you forget your password, Renesource Capital FX Professional sends you a new password by . You can change the address to which Renesource Capital FX Professional sends the new password.

24 1.5 Logging Out of Renesource Capital FX Professional 24 To change your address: 1. Select Tools > Password Maintenance. The Password Maintenance window opens. Figure 1-1 Password Maintenance Window 2. Enter your current password in the Password field and click Submit. The Password Maintenance window opens with your security details. Figure 1-2 Password Maintenance Window with Security Details 3. Enter your address in the Address field. This is the address to which Renesource Capital FX Professional sends a new password if you forget your password. 4. Click Submit. 1.5 Logging Out of Renesource Capital FX Professional To log out of Renesource Capital FX Professional without closing the application, select File > Logout or press Alt+F+O. The Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window opens, allowing you to log in again, set connectivity settings, or close Renesource Capital FX Professional. To log out and close the application, select File > Exit.

25 1.5 Logging Out of Renesource Capital FX Professional 25 If you have done trades or messages that you have not read, Renesource Capital FX Professional displays a popup window notifying you. See Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142. Depending on how your connection to the FX Grid is configured, any open, active orders may be cancelled when you log out or exit. Renesource Capital FX Professional displays a popup window notifying you of active orders when you log out. See Order Persistence on page 183 All users are automatically logged out at Friday at 23:00:00 UTC so that necessary system maintenance can be performed.

26 CHAPTER 2 Trading 2.1 Introduction You use Renesource Capital FX Professional to both take prices from the market and to make prices in the market. Renesource Capital FX Professional handles all trading activity, price taking and price making, as orders of various types: Taking Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) on page 27 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices on page 30 Submitting an Order on page 41 Understanding orders in Renesource Capital FX Professional and how to configure Renesource Capital FX Professional is essential to using Renesource Capital FX Professional to satisfy your FX trading needs. Although all trading activity in Renesource Capital FX Professional is handled as orders, different terminology is used to distinguish the two fundamental trading workflows of price taking and price making: Price taking ( Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) on page 55): When you click a price in the trading modules, you are taking a price. See the following topics about price-taking tools: o The FX Board Module on page 154 o The Full Book Module on page 160 o The RFS Module on page 202 o The RFS Full Book Module on page 206 Price making ( Orders Overview on page 180): Using the Orders module to make a price is referred to as submitting an order. See the following topics about price-making tools: o The Orders Module on page 168 o The Advanced Orders Module on page 189 o Covering Your Open Positions on page 94 o Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96

27 2.2 Taking Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) Taking Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) ESP price taking involves clicking a streaming price in the The FX Board Module on page 154 or The Full Book Module on page 160. Intrafloor Prices on page 27 Taking Prices from the FX Board Module on page 27 Taking Prices from the Full Book Module on page Intrafloor Prices Intrafloor prices are displayed orders submitted by other users in your own organization. If you have the correct permissions, you can see intrafloor prices as untradable prices or as prices that you can hit and execute trades with. Intrafloor prices are shown in the trading modules with your organization s name in italic type Taking Prices from the FX Board Module The FX Board module lets you take the best bid and offer prices for a range of currency pairs by multiple liquidity providers. When you take a price from the FX Board module, Renesource Capital FX Professional enters the transaction as an order. You can configure the order type, execution, and the time in force. See Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size on page 123, Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules on page 119, and Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules on page 119. You can use the mouse or the keyboard to take prices. Renesource Capital FX Professional adds a one-second delay between trade executions to protect you from accidentally executing more trades than you intend. Using the Mouse To Take Prices To take a price using the mouse: 1. (Optional) Choose a different currency pair from the currency pair combo box. 2. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button. The button changes color to indicate that you are dealing the term currency. 3. (Optional) Enter a new size or choose a different default size from the amount field. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 4. Depending on how you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional, click or doubleclick the buy/sell price in the take price button. See Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking on page 118 for more details. Renesource Capital FX Professional enters your request as an order and sends it to the liquidity provider through the FX Grid.

28 2.2 Taking Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) 28 Within a few seconds you should receive confirmation of your request and trade verification. The Blotter module (see Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64) updates with your latest trading activity. Using the Keyboard To Take Prices See FX Board Module Keyboard Shortcuts on page 232 for all the keys you can use in the FX Board module to navigate the module and to take prices Taking Prices from the Full Book Module The Full Book module lets you take bid and offer prices offered for a currency pair by liquidity providers. When you take a price from the Full Book module, Renesource Capital FX Professional enters the transaction as an order. You can configure the order type, execution, and the time in force. See Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size on page 123, Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules on page 119, and Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules on page 119. You can use the mouse or the keyboard to take prices. Renesource Capital FX Professional adds a one-second delay between trade executions to protect you from accidentally executing more trades than you intend. Using the Mouse To Take Prices To take a price using the mouse: 1. (Optional) Choose a different currency pair from the currency pair combo box. 2. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button. The button changes color to indicate that you are dealing the term currency. 3. (Optional) Enter a new size or choose a different default size from the amount field. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 4. Depending on how you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional, click or doubleclick a bid or offer price for the currency pair. See Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking on page 118 for more details. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity provider through the FX Grid. Within a few seconds you should receive confirmation of your request and trade verification. NOTE: When you trade from the Full Book module, sweep execution is used when you configure either the VWAP/Sweep or Sweep execution strategy. Renesource Capital FX Professional sweeps the market from the top of the book to the price that you clicked. The Blotter module (see Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64) updates with your latest trading activity.

29 2.2 Taking Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) 29 Using the Keyboard To Take Prices See Full Book Module Keyboard Shortcuts on page 232 for information about the keys you can use in the Full Book module to navigate the module and to take prices Trading ESP from the Sales Dealer Module The Sales Dealer module lets you view prices from your ESP stream subscriptions and take the best prices. To execute an ESP spot trade from the Sales Dealer module: 1. Open the Sales Dealer module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Select Modules > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Click the Sales Dealer button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Click the ESP option button to select ESP trading. 3. (Optional) Specify a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. If you are subscribed to the currency pair, the module should show ESP prices within a second or two. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 7. (Optional) Specify a size with the Amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 8. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 9. Click the Sell or Buy button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to trade to the liquidity provider through the FX Grid. Within a few seconds you should receive confirmation of your request and trade verification. Renesource Capital FX Professional then cancels the streams from the providers that you did not hit. The Blotter module (see Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64) updates with your latest trading activity. If you do not want to execute a trade from the streams on offer, you can either allow the streams to expire or you can click Cancel to stop the streams and free up network resources. If you lose your network connection, your RFS streams are cancelled.

30 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices RFS price taking involves submitting a request for stream to one or more liquidity providers, receiving the stream of prices, and clicking a price in the RFS module or RFS Full Book module. Trading from the RFS Module on page 30 Trading from the RFS Full Book Module on page Trading from the RFS Module The RFS module lets you submit an RFS request to multiple liquidity providers and then take the top of the book. You can submit a request and execute RFS prices for several trade types. RFS Spot on page 30 Outright on page 31 NDF on page 32 Swap on page 33 RFS Spot To execute a spot trade from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS from the menu. o Click the RFS button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select SP for spot from the type drop-down list. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 7. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 8. (Optional) Specify a size with the amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 9. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 10. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 11. Click the Get Price button.

31 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 31 Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 12. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Outright To execute an outright trade from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS from the menu. o Click the RFS button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select OR for outright from the type drop-down list. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. Use the Value Date tools to specify the value date by doing one of the following: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 7. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 8. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 9. (Optional) Specify a size with the amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 10. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 11. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 12. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 13. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices.

32 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 32 NDF To execute an NDF from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS from the menu. o Click the RFS button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select NDF for outright from the type drop-down list. The list of currency pairs available from the Ccy Pair drop-down list changes to show only NDF currency pairs. Conversely, if you first choose a currency pair that is non-deliverable, the RFS module selects the NDF trade type automatically. Also, the Material Economic Terms link appears under the Get Price button. Clicking the link opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose an NDF currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. Choose either Value Date or Fixing Date for your NDF price request from the drop-down list. 7. Do one of the following to specify the date: o For Value Date only, choose a tenor from the tenor drop-down list or enter a tenor in the field. o Value Date or Fixing Date, enter a broken date in the field or choose a broken date with the calendar button ( ). See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 8. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 9. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by choosing the dealt currency from the currency drop-down list. 10. (Optional) Specify a size with the amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 11. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 12. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 13. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 14. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices.

33 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 33 Swap To execute a swap trade from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS from the menu. o Click the RFS button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select SW for swap from the type drop-down list. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. Use the Near Date and Far Date tools to specify the near and far value dates by doing one of the following: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 7. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down lists: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 8. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down lists. 9. (Optional) If you want to request prices for a mismatched swap, uncheck the Matched checkbox. 10. (Optional) Enter or choose the leg sizes with the amount combo box. For matched swaps, only the near size is active. For mismatched swaps, you can edit both the near and far sizes. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 11. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 12. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 13. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 14. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to trade to the liquidity provider through the FX Grid. Within a few seconds you should receive confirmation of your request and trade verification.

34 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 34 Renesource Capital FX Professional then cancels the streams from the providers that you did not hit. The Blotter module (see Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64) updates with your latest trading activity. If you do not want to execute a trade from the streams on offer, you can either allow the streams to expire or you can click Cancel to stop the streams and free up network resources. If you lose your network connection, your RFS streams are cancelled Trading from the RFS Full Book Module The RFS Full Book module lets you submit a request for streaming prices from multiple liquidity providers and to execute on those prices. You can submit a request and execute RFS prices for several trade types: RFS Spot on page 34 Outright on page 35 NDF on page 35 Swap on page 36 RFS Spot To execute a spot trade from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS Full Book module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Click the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select SP for spot from the trade type drop-down list. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 7. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 8. (Optional) Enter or choose a size with the amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 9. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 10. Click a price button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices.

35 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 35 Outright To execute an outright trade from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS Full Book module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Click the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select OR for outright from the Type drop-down list. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. Use the Value Date tools to specify the value date by doing one of the following: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 7. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the Direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 8. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 9. (Optional) Enter or choose a size with the amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 10. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 11. Click a price button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. NDF To execute an NDF from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS Full Book module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Click the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select NDF for outright from the Type drop-down list.

36 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 36 The list of currency pairs available from the Ccy Pair drop-down list changes to show only NDF currency pairs. Conversely, if you first choose a currency pair that is non-deliverable, the RFS module selects the NDF trade type automatically. Also, the Material Economic Terms link appears under the Get Price button. Clicking the link opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose an NDF currency pair with the Ccy Pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 6. Choose either Value Date or Fixing Date for your NDF price request from the drop-down list. 7. Do one of the following to specify the date: o For Value Date only, choose a tenor from the tenor drop-down list or enter a tenor in the field. o Value Date or Fixing Date, enter a broken date in the field or choose a broken date with the calendar button ( ). See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 8. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 9. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by choosing the dealt currency from the currency drop-down list. 10. (Optional) Enter or choose a size with the amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 11. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 12. Click a price button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Swap To execute a swap trade from the RFS module: 1. Open the RFS Full Book module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Click the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Select SW for swap from the Type drop-down list. 3. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the Ccy Pair combo box. 4. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box.

37 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices Use the Near Date and Far Date tools to specify the near and far value dates by doing one of the following: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 7. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the Direction drop-down lists: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 8. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down lists. 9. (Optional) If you want to request prices for a mismatched swap, uncheck the Matched checkbox. 10. (Optional) Enter or choose the leg sizes with the amount combo box. For matched swaps, only the near size is active. For mismatched swaps, you can edit both the near and far sizes. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 11. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS prices. 12. Click a price button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to trade to the liquidity provider through the FX Grid. Within a few seconds you should receive confirmation of your request and trade verification. Renesource Capital FX Professional then cancels the streams from the providers that you did not hit. The Blotter module (see Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64) updates with your latest trading activity. If you do not want to execute a trade from the streams on offer, you can either allow the streams to expire or you can click Cancel to stop the streams and free up network resources. If you lose your network connection, your RFS streams are cancelled Trading RFS from the Sales Dealer Module The Sales Dealer module lets you submit an RFS request to multiple liquidity providers and then take the top of the book. You can submit a request and execute RFS prices for several trade types: RFS Spot on page 38 Outright on page 38 NDF on page 39 Swap on page 40

38 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices 38 RFS Spot To execute an RFS spot trade from the Sales Dealer module: 1. Open the Sales Dealer module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Select Modules > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Click the Sales Dealer button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Click the RFS option button. 3. Select SP for spot from the Type drop-down list. 4. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 6. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 7. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 8. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the Direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 9. (Optional) Specify a size with the Amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 10. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 11. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 12. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS streams. 13. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Outright To execute an outright trade from the Sales Dealer module: 1. Open the Sales Dealer module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Select Modules > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Click the Sales Dealer button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Click the RFS option button. 3. Select OR for outright from the Type drop-down list. 4. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box.

39 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 6. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 7. Use the Value Date tools to specify the value date by doing one of the following: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 8. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the Direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 9. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down list. 10. (Optional) Specify a size with the Amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 11. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 12. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 13. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS streams. 14. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. NDF To execute an NDF from the Sales Dealer module: 1. Open the Sales Dealer module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Select Modules > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Click the Sales Dealer button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Click the RFS option button. 3. Select NDF for outright from the Type drop-down list. The list of currency pairs available from the Ccy Pair drop-down list changes to show only NDF currency pairs. Conversely, if you first choose a currency pair that is non-deliverable, the Sales Dealer module selects the NDF trade type automatically. Also, the Material Economic Terms link appears under the Get Price button. Clicking the link opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system. 4. (Optional) Enter or choose an NDF currency pair with the Ccy Pair combo box.

40 2.3 Taking Request for Stream (RFS) Prices (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 6. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box. 7. Choose either Value Date or Fixing Date for your NDF price request from the combo box. 8. Do one of the following to specify the date: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 9. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the direction drop-down list: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 10. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by choosing the dealt currency from the currency drop-down list. 11. (Optional) Specify a size with the Amount combo box. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 12. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 13. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 14. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS streams. 15. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Swap To execute a swap trade from the Sales Dealer module: 1. Open the Sales Dealer module if it is not already open: o Select File > New > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Select Modules > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Click the Sales Dealer button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Click the RFS option button. 3. Select SW for swap from the Type drop-down list. 4. (Optional) Enter or choose a currency pair with the currency pair combo box. 5. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can specify the organization from the Org combo box. 6. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another legal entity, you can specify the legal entity from the Acct combo box.

41 2.4 Submitting an Order Use the Near Date and Far Date tools to specify the near and far value dates by doing one of the following: o Choose a tenor from the tenor combo box. o Enter a tenor in the tenor combo box. o Enter a broken date in the date field. o Choose a broken date with the calendar button. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about dates and tenors. 8. (Optional) Choose the direction of your requested stream from the Direction drop-down lists: Buy, Sell, 2-Way. 9. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency from the dealt currency drop-down lists. 10. If you want to request prices for a mismatched swap, uncheck the Matched checkbox. 11. (Optional) Enter or choose the leg sizes with the amount combo box. For matched swaps, only the near size is active. For mismatched swaps, you can edit both the near and far sizes. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 12. (Optional) Enter any notes or instructions in the Settlement Instructions field. Check the Remember checkbox if you want the module to retain your entry when you submit the request so that your instructions are available if you close the module or log out. 13. (Optional) If you are trading on behalf of another organization, you can customize the spreads on the executed trade with the Additional Spreads tools. 14. Click the Get Price button. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to the liquidity providers that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. In a few moments, the module displays prices with expiry countdown timers as providers respond to your request with RFS streams. 15. Click the Sell or Buy button to take the price before the expiry timer runs out or click Cancel to withdraw your request and stop prices. Renesource Capital FX Professional sends your request to trade to the liquidity provider through the FX Grid. Within a few seconds you should receive confirmation of your request and trade verification. Renesource Capital FX Professional then cancels the streams from the providers that you did not hit. The Blotter module (see Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64) updates with your latest trading activity. If you do not want to execute a trade from the streams on offer, you can either allow the streams to expire or you can click Cancel to stop the streams and free up network resources. If you lose your network connection, your RFS streams are cancelled. 2.4 Submitting an Order You can submit an order in Renesource Capital FX Professional in the following ways: Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42 Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page 45

42 2.4 Submitting an Order 42 Copying Orders on page 46 The Advanced Orders Module on page 189 Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48 Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94 Covering Your Open Positions on page 94 Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180 For information about the types of orders that you can submit, see Orders Overview on page 180. The orders you submit are added to the list in the Orders module to display the order s status, including the amount entered and the amount done. Your order price is also added to the depth of book in the Full Book module. The background color of an order entry indicates its status: Active orders with no fills are white. Active partially filled orders are light green. Expired partially filled orders are light yellow. Completed or cancelled orders are gray Submitting an Order from the Orders Module Depending on your user permissions, you can submit several types of order from the Orders module. While your order is active, you can cancel it. See Canceling Orders on page 173 for more details. For more information about the types of orders that you can submit, see Orders Overview on page 180. Limit Orders on page 42 Market and Market Range Orders on page 43 Stop Orders on page 44 Limit Orders To submit a limit (LMT) order: 1. If the Orders module is not already open, select Modules > Orders or click the Orders button in the toolbar. 2. Choose or enter the currency pair from the combo box. 3. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button. 4. Select LMT from the order type drop-down list. 5. Enter the pips in the fields or use the up and down arrows to adjust the pips: o To make a bid order, enter the bid pips in the left field. o To make an offer order, enter the offer pips in the right field. NOTE: Renesource Capital FX Professional validates your pips entry. See Pips Validation on page 49 for more details. 6. (Optional) Edit the big numbers for the bid and offer.

43 2.4 Submitting an Order 43 NOTE: Editing the big number values stops automatic updates of the values from the streaming market prices. To clear your edited values and restore automatic updates, click the Cancel button. 7. (Optional) Change the default bid and offer amounts in their respective yellow fields. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 8. (Optional) If you are submitting a displayed order, you can enter a display size (see display size on page 239) lower than the order size in the Show fields to enter an iceberg order. Leave empty to display the entire order amount to the market. Enter 0 (zero) to enter a hidden order. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 9. Choose the time in force for your order from the TIF drop-down list. See Time in Force on page 184. o Select GTC for a good till cancelled order. o Select GTT for a good till time order and enter the expiry time in seconds in the field. o Select DAY for a day order. 10. (Optional) Check the Start Time checkbox to choose a time when your order begins matching: o Start Now: Matching begins immediately after you submit the order. o Start In: A field appears that allows you to set a relative time. Matching begins in the number of seconds/minutes/hours after you submit the order. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. o Start At: Two fields appear for you to set an absolute time, one allowing you to enter a time of day and the other allowing you to choose a number of days after the current trading day. Matching begins at the date and time that you specify. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. 11. Click Enter to submit the order. Your order appears in the Orders module at the top of the order list and in the Full Book module with your organization s short name in red text with black brackets. Your limit order may be hidden or displayed depending on your trading relationships and connection to an order host. Hidden orders are displayed in red text. Displayed orders are displayed in brackets and red text. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. You can amend your order as long as it is active. See Amending Orders on page 174. Market and Market Range Orders Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to submit two types of market orders: Market: Trades are executed against the order at market rates at the top of the book until the order is filled or cancelled. Market range: You define an execution range of pips. Trades are executed against the order within the execution range until the order is filled or cancelled. To submit a market (MKT) order: 1. If the Orders module is not already open, select Modules > Orders or click the Orders button in the toolbar. 2. Choose or enter the currency pair from the combo box. 3. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button.

44 2.4 Submitting an Order Select MKT from the order type drop-down list. The bid-side Show field changes to the Bid/Offer drop-down list. 5. Select either Bid or Offer from the Bid/Offer drop-down list. This is the side that you are executing on. 6. Choose the time in force for your order from the TIF drop-down list. See Time in Force on page 184. o Select DAY for a day order. o Select GTC for a good till cancelled order. o Select GTT for a good till time order and enter the expiry time in seconds in the field. 7. Do one of the following to set the execution range of your order: o Market range: Check the Range checkbox and enter the range of pips in the field. You can enter decimal values of one decimal place. The default execution range appears in the field when you check the checkbox. You can define the default value for each currency pair. See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124. o Market: Uncheck the Range checkbox. Your order will match against all top-of-book prices until filled, cancelled, or expired. 8. (Optional) Change the default bid or offer amount in the yellow amount field. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 9. (Optional) If you are submitting a displayed order, you can enter a display size (see display size on page 239) lower than the order size in the Show fields to enter an iceberg order. Leave empty to display the entire order amount to the market. Enter 0 (zero) to enter a hidden order. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 10. (Optional) Check the Start Time checkbox to choose a time when your order begins matching: o Start Now: Matching begins immediately after you submit the order. o Start In: A field appears that allows you to set a relative time. Matching begins in the number of seconds/minutes/hours after you submit the order. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. o Start At: Two fields appear for you to set an absolute time, one allowing you to enter a time of day and the other allowing you to choose a number of days after the current trading day. Matching begins at the date and time that you specify. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. 11. Click Enter to submit the order. Your order appears in the Orders module at the top of the order list and in the Full Book module with your organization s short name and MKT in red text with black brackets. You can amend your order as long as it is active or delayed. See Amending Orders on page 174. Stop Orders To submit a stop order: 1. If the Orders module is not already open, select Modules > Orders or click the Orders button in the toolbar. 2. Choose or enter the currency pair from the combo box. 3. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button. 4. Select STOP from the order type drop-down list.

45 2.4 Submitting an Order Enter the pips in the fields or use the up and down arrows to adjust the pips: o To make a bid order, enter the bid pips in the left field. o To make an offer order, enter the offer pips in the right field. 6. If you have the proper user permissions, select either Bid or Offer from the Trigger dropdown list. This is the side that triggers order matching. Otherwise, if the order is an offer, then the trigger defaults to the bid price and if the order is a bid, then the trigger defaults to the offer price. NOTE: Renesource Capital FX Professional validates your pips entry. See Pips Validation on page 49 for more details. 7. Choose the time in force for your order from the TIF drop-down list. See Time in Force on page 184. o Select DAY for a day order. o Select GTC for a good till cancelled order. 8. (Optional) Edit the big numbers for the bid and offer. NOTE: Editing the big number values stops automatic updates of the values from the streaming market prices. To clear your edited values and restore automatic updates, click the Cancel button. 9. (Optional) Change the default bid and offer amounts in their respective yellow fields. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 10. (Optional) Check the Start Time checkbox to choose a time when your order begins matching: o Start Now: Matching begins immediately after you submit the order. o Start In: A field appears that allows you to set a relative time. Matching begins in the number of seconds/minutes/hours after you submit the order. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. o Start At: Two fields appear for you to set an absolute time, one allowing you to enter a time of day and the other allowing you to choose a number of days after the current trading day. Matching begins at the date and time that you specify. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. 11. Click Enter to submit the order. Your order appears in the Orders module at the top of the order list and in the Full Book module with your organization s short name and the label STOP to indicate that it is a stop order. While your order is pending, it is displayed in the Full Book module on the opposite side of the market. A bid stop order is displayed on the offer side. An offer stop order is displayed on the bid side. When the order is triggered, it moves to its respective side is matched with prices at the top of the book until filled. You can amend your order as long as is active. See Amending Orders on page Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules You can quickly submit limit orders from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book) using the Quick Order buttons.

46 2.4 Submitting an Order 46 NOTE: You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to show or hide the Quick Order buttons. See Showing and Hiding the Quick Order Buttons on page 132 and Quick Order Buttons Described on page 165. Figure 2-1 Quick Order Buttons in FX Board Module The appearance and behavior of the Quick Order buttons and the execution of orders submitted with them depend on how you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional. See Quick Orders Settings on page 131. To submit an order with the Quick Order buttons: 1. Choose the currency pair from the combo box. 2. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page (Optional) Enter a new size or choose a different default size from the amount field. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 4. Depending on how you have configured the Quick Order buttons, you do one of the following to submit your order: o Click a Sell/Buy or a Bid/Offer Quick Order button. A drop-down list opens with pips values offset from the top-of-book price. Click the price you want to submit. o Click a Sell/Buy or a Bid/Offer Quick Order button. A drop-down list opens with offset values. Click the offset from the top-of-book price that you want to submit. o Click a Quick Order button showing a pips increment value. Your order is submitted with the price you chose and appears in the Orders module at the top of the order list. You can choose whether application focus shifts to the Orders module or not. See Activating the Orders Module When You Submit Orders in Other Modules on page 131. While your order is active, you can cancel it. See Canceling Orders on page 173 for more details Copying Orders You can copy an order to quickly enter a new order with minimal input. All orders in the system are effectively order templates. You can copy an order in any state (active, filled, cancelled, expired).

47 2.4 Submitting an Order 47 To copy an order: 1. Click the Copy button ( ) of the order that you want to copy in the Orders module list or click the COPY button of the order in the Orders blotter. If not already open, the Orders module appears and updates with the copied order s values. 2. Edit the order s values as needed in the Orders module. See Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42 for details. 3. Click Enter to submit the order Submitting Linked Orders You construct linked orders with the Advanced Orders module, adding component orders to the list in the module. When the component orders are ready, you submit them all at once and then administer the order chain and the individual linked orders in the Orders module and Orders blotter. You can also create linked orders with the following tools: The LINK button of active orders in the Orders module (see Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48) The LINK button of active orders in the Orders blotter (see Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48) The TP/SL button of filled orders in the Orders module (see Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94) The TP/SL button of positions in the Positions blotter (see Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94) To submit a linked order (OCO, TP/SL) from the Advanced Orders module: 1. If the Advanced Orders module is not already open, select Modules > Advanced Orders or click the Advanced Orders button in the toolbar. 2. Choose the currency pair from the combo box. 3. Choose whether the component order is a buy or sell order from the Buy/Sell drop-down list. 4. Choose the order type of the component order from the Type drop-down list: o LMT for a limit order o STOP for a stop order o TP/SL to add both a limit and a stop order as a take profit/stop loss order. The list in the Advanced Orders module must be empty. NOTE: A TP/SL order can only be added to the Advanced Orders list when there are no other orders in the list. 5. (Optional) Change the default order size in the Order Amount field. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 6. (Optional) Choose to trade the base or term currency by clicking the dealt currency toggle button. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page (Optional) If you are submitting the component order as a displayed order, you can enter a display size (see display size) lower than the order size in the Show fields to enter an iceberg order. Leave empty to display the entire order amount to the market. Enter 0 (zero) to enter a hidden

48 2.4 Submitting an Order 48 order. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. Not applicable to stop orders. 8. (Optional) If you are adding a limit order or a TP/SL order, enter the order price in the Limit Price field. This field is automatically populated with the top-of-book-price when you choose a new value from the Buy/Sell and Type drop-down lists. 9. (Optional) If you are adding a stop order or a TP/SL order, enter the stop price in the Stop Price field. This field is automatically populated with the top-of-book-price when you choose a new value from the Buy/Sell and Type drop-down lists. 10. Choose the time in force for the component order from the Time in Force drop-down list. See Time in Force on page 184 and item 14 of Advanced Orders Module Components on page 190. o DAY : day order o GTC : good till cancelled order. o GTT : good till time order and enter the expiry time in seconds in the field. This time in force is only applicable to limit orders. 11. Choose the contingency type of the linked orders from the Contingency drop-down list (does not apply to TP/SL orders): o OCO : One Cancels the Other: If one order in the order chain is filled, then all the other orders in the chain are cancelled. 12. Click the Add button to enter the component order in the list. If you are adding a TP/SL order, then list in the Advanced Orders module must be empty. A TP/SL order can only be added to the Advanced Orders list when there are no other orders in the list. 13. Repeat Step 2 through Step 12 for each component order. You must add at least two component orders before you can submit the linked order chain. If you want to submit a single, unlinked order with the settings in the module, click the Submit button with only one order in the list. 14. After you have added all the component orders, click the Enter OCO button. All of the component orders must pass validation. If one order in the chain fails validation, you must either remove the failed component order by clicking its Remove button or, if applicable, ignore the warning by checking the Ignore and continue checkbox. See item 18 of Advanced Orders Module Components on page 190. After the component orders pass validation, they appear in the Orders module as separate entries in the order list with the link ID indicating their contingency link. You can amend individual component orders ( Amending Orders on page 174) or fill a component order as a market order ( Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180) Linking an Active Order to a New Order You can link an active order to another new order, creating a linked order chain. You can link one active order at a time. To link an active order to a new order: 1. In the Orders module list or in the Orders blotter, click the LINK button of the order you want to hedge. A window opens asking you to confirm adding the active order to the Advanced Orders module list. 2. Click Yes.

49 2.5 Order Submission Examples 49 If not already open, the Advanced Orders module opens with the active order as a component order in the list. 3. Add the additional component orders that make up your linked order chain. For details, see Step 2 through Step 12 of Submitting Linked Orders on page 47. When you submit the linked order chain, the component orders appear in the Orders module as separate entries in the order list with the link order ID indicating their contingency link Pips Validation To help prevent you from submitting erroneous and potentially costly orders, Renesource Capital FX Professional validates the pips that you enter according to the following rules: If the difference between the pips entered and best bid price pips is over 40, Renesource Capital FX Professional rejects the pips and warns you to double-check the big figure. For example, if the top of the book is and you enter a pips value of 58. Renesource Capital FX Professional rejects your entry because the pips difference is 41. If the pips value you enter does not match the pips precision of the currency pair, Renesource Capital FX Professional rejects your entry and warns you to check the pips. For example, if you enter a pips value of 4 for EUR/USD with a pips precision of two places, Renesource Capital FX Professional cannot determine if you intended to enter 04 or 40 and rejects your entry. The exception to this rule is currency pairs quoted to three places (half pips) like EUR/GBP. In this case, if you enter two places, Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes the third place is 0 (zero). For example, you enter 03 and Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes Order Submission Examples The following examples help illustrate the behavior of Renesource Capital FX Professional so that you can better meet your liquidity needs. Stop Order: Bid with Bid Trigger Rate on page 49 Stop Order: Bid with Offer Trigger Rate on page 51 Stop Order: Offer with Offer Trigger on page 52 Stop Order: Offer with Bid Trigger on page Stop Order: Bid with Bid Trigger Rate NOTE: You need the proper user permissions to submit a bid stop order with a bid trigger rate. Initial Book Assume EUR/USD has the following book depth as shown in the Full Book module (only pips):

50 2.5 Order Submission Examples 50 Table 2-1 Initial Book Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 10M M Your bid orders must be for more than 43. Your offer orders must be for less than 40. Order Submission You submit a bid order at 45 for 25M and with the trigger rate as bid. The Full Book module shows your bid order in the book in the context of the offer prices that your order must be executed against: Table 2-2 Book After Bid Order with Bid Trigger Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 10M 35 45* 25M* M * Your stop bid order Note that your bid order appears executable because it is higher than the prices of 43 and 44 in the market. However, because you specified a bid trigger price, your order is executed when the best bid price reaches 45. Order Execution In a moving market, assume the bid price reaches 45. At this point, your bid order moves to the bid side and is executed against the current market offer prices. The new book would appear as follows: Table 2-3 Bid Order with Bid Trigger Rate Hit Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 25M* 45* 46 5M 10M M 5M M

51 2.5 Order Submission Examples 51 Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M * Your stop bid order Renesource Capital FX Professional matches only from the top of the book. So only 5M from 25M will be matched against the rate of 46. The next match would be made only on the next rate update against the top of the book Stop Order: Bid with Offer Trigger Rate Initial Book Assume EUR/USD has the following book depth as shown in the Full Book module (only pips): Table 2-1 Initial Book Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 10M M Your bid orders must be for more than 43. Your offer orders must be for less than 40. Order Submission You submit a bid order at 45 for 25M and with the trigger rate as offer. The Full Book module shows your bid order in the book in the context of the offer prices that your order must be executed against: Table 2-2 Book After Bid Order with Offer Trigger Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 10M 35 45* 25M* M * Your stop bid order

52 2.5 Order Submission Examples 52 Because you specified an offer trigger price, your order is executed when the best offer price reaches 45. Order Execution In a moving market, assume the offer price reaches 45. At this point, your bid order moves to the bid side and is executed against the current market offer prices. The new book would appear as follows: Table 2-3 Book After Bid Order with Offer Trigger Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 25M* 45* 45 5M 10M M 5M M 10M M 10M * Your stop bid order Renesource Capital FX Professional matches only from the top of the book. So only 5M from 25M will be matched against the rate of 45. The next match would be made only on the next rate update against the top of the book Stop Order: Offer with Offer Trigger NOTE: You need the proper user permissions to submit an offer stop order with an offer trigger rate. Initial Book Assume EUR/USD has the following book depth as shown in the Full Book module (only pips): Table 2-1 Initial Book Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 10M M Your bid orders must be for more than 43. Your offer orders must be for less than 40.

53 2.5 Order Submission Examples 53 Order Submission You submit an offer order at 37 for 25M and with the trigger rate as offer. The Full Book module shows your bid order in the book in the context of the offer prices that your order must be executed against: Table 2-2 Book After Offer Order with Offer Trigger Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 25M* 37* 46 10M 10M * Your stop offer order Order Execution In a moving market, assume the offer price reaches 37. At this point, your offer order moves to the offer side and is executed against the current market bid prices. The new book would appear as follows: Table 2-3 Offer Order with Offer Trigger Rate Hit Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M 36 37* 25M* 10M M 5M M 10M M M * Your stop offer order Renesource Capital FX Professional matches only from the top of the book. So only 10M from 25M is matched against the rate of 36. The next match would be made only on the next rate update against the top of the book.

54 2.5 Order Submission Examples Stop Order: Offer with Bid Trigger Initial Book Assume EUR/USD has the following book depth as shown in the Full Book module (only pips): Table 2-1 Initial Book Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 10M M Your bid orders must be for more than 43. Your offer orders must be for less than 40. Order Submission You submit an offer order at 40 for 25M and with the trigger rate as bid. The Full Book module shows your bid order in the book in the context of the offer prices that your order must be executed against: Table 2-2 Book After Offer Order with Offer Trigger Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M M 10M M 5M M 25M* 37* 46 10M 10M * Your stop offer order Order Execution In a moving market, assume the bid price reaches 37. At this point, your offer order moves to the offer side and is executed against the current market bid prices. The new book would appear as follows:

55 2.6 Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) 55 Table 2-3 Offer Order with Bid Trigger Hit Bid Amt Pips Pips Offer Amt 10M 37 37* 25M* 10M M 5M M 10M M M * Your stop offer order Renesource Capital FX Professional matches only from the top of the book. So only 10M from 25M is matched against the bid rate of 37. The next match would be made only on the next rate update against the top of the book. 2.6 Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) Renesource Capital FX Professional supports two methodologies for receiving prices and executing trades, Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) and Request for Stream (RFS). Your user permissions determine the methodologies that you can use. Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) on page 55 Request for Stream (RFS) on page 56 ESP and RFS Compared on page Executable Streaming Prices (ESP) You execute trades directly with ESP streams from the FX Board and Full Book modules. See Taking Prices from the FX Board Module on page 27 and Taking Prices from the Full Book Module on page 28 for details. Renesource Capital FX Professional initiates ESP streams when you log in. The streams live for the duration of your trading session. The ESP methodology applies to spot trades only. You manage ESP streams with standing subscriptions in currency pairs from a liquidity provider. See Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) on page 134 for details. When you submit an order from the Orders module, Renesource Capital FX Professional matches your order against incoming ESP streams. See Submitting an Order on page 41 for details.

56 2.6 Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) Request for Stream (RFS) You initiate RFS streams and execute trades from the RFS module and RFS Full Book module. See Trading from the RFS Module on page 30 and Trading from the RFS Full Book Module on page 34 for details. Each RFS stream results from a discrete request from you and has an expiry time, typically 120 seconds. With the RFS methodology, you can request streams for spot, outright, and swap trades depending on your permissions. You configure the liquidity providers to receive your requests for each currency pair. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127 for details ESP and RFS Compared The following table highlights the differences between the ESP and RFS methodologies: Table 2-1 ESP and RFS Compared Comparison ESP RFS What trade types are supported? How do I start a stream? Which liquidity providers get my request for stream? How do I do a trade? Spot only Spot Outright Swap NDF ESP streams are started when you log in. You configure ESP providers according to your ESP subscriptions. See Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) on page 134. Click a price in the FX Board module or the Full Book module. See: Taking Prices from the FX Board Module on page 27 Taking Prices from the Full Book Module on page 28 You submit a request for stream from the RFS module or the RFS Full Book module. See: Trading from the RFS Module on page 30 Trading from the RFS Full Book Module on page 34 You configure the RFS providers who receive your request for each currency pair. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. Submit a request and click a price in the RFS module or the RFS Full Book module. See: Trading from the RFS Module on page 30 Trading from the RFS Full Book Module on page 34

57 2.7 Entering Amounts 57 Comparison ESP RFS When does the stream expire? The stream does not expire. You receive prices as long as: You are logged in. You are connected. You have a trading relationship with the provider. You configure the provider for the currency pair. See Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) on page 134. The provider streams prices for the currency pair. The currency pair is shown in the FX Board or Full Book module. You set a default expiry time for RFS requests, but the provider ultimately determines a stream s expiry. See Setting the Default RFS Expiry Time on page Entering Amounts Renesource Capital FX Professional interprets your amount entries to make your work faster and more secure. Entering Decimal Amounts on page 57 Unit Shortcuts on page 57 Assuming the Unit Shortcut for Currencies on page 58 Entering Amounts and Maximum Order Size on page Entering Decimal Amounts The amount fields in Renesource Capital FX Professional allow you to enter decimal amounts. This is especially useful when trading small lots of commodities, such as gold and silver. To enter a decimal amount, do not include thousands separators. For example, if the decimal indicator is a comma, you would enter 10000,59. See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 for information about setting the thousands separator and decimal indicator characters Unit Shortcuts You can use the following unit shortcuts when you enter sizes in Renesource Capital FX Professional: K or k for thousands M or m for millions B or b for billions For example, 34.5K, 10M, and 2b are all valid entries.

58 2.7 Entering Amounts Assuming the Unit Shortcut for Currencies You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to make certain assumptions about entries of four or less whole numbers to protect you from entering inadvertently large amounts. See Enabling Automatic Unit Shortcuts on page 111. NOTE: These unit assumptions only apply to currencies. If you are trading metals, you must enter the unit shortcut manually. If you enter an amount with one or two whole-number digits, Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes that you are asking for millions. Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes that whole-number amounts of three or four digits are in thousands. For entries with more than four whole numbers, Renesource Capital FX Professional does not assume a unit shortcut. Table 2-1 Unit Assumptions for Currencies You enter... Entry Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes... Shortcut Equivalent Four whole numbers ,500, k or 1.5m Three whole numbers , k Two whole numbers 50 50,000,000 50m Two whole numbers ,500, m More than four whole numbers ,000,000 3m Entering Amounts and Maximum Order Size If you have defined a maximum order size, Renesource Capital FX Professional may disable the currency pair as you enter your amount. For example, say that you need to trade 50K and you have set your maximum order size to 5M. After you have entered 50, Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes 50M, which broaches your 5M maximum order size, and disables the currency pair. When you enter the unit amount K, Renesource Capital FX Professional enables the currency pair and you are able to trade. Renesource Capital FX Professional performs this disabling and enabling automatically with no action needed from you apart from entering amounts smaller than your maximum order size. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 for details.

59 2.8 Entering Dates and Tenors Entering Dates and Tenors You can specify both specific dates and tenors for the value date of your outright and swap requests in the RFS modules: Tenors on page 59 Entering Tenors for Swaps in the RFS Module on page 60 Tenor Shortcuts for Overnights and Tomorrow Next Swaps on page 60 Broken Dates on page Tenors To specify a tenor, either enter the tenor manually in the value date field or choose a tenor from the value date drop-down list. You define the tenors that you see in the value date drop-down lists and the order in which the tenors appear. See Setting Default Tenors for Outright and Swap RFS on page 126 for more details. The following tenors are supported by Renesource Capital FX Professional. Not all tenors can be chosen as a default tenors as indicated by the Default column. See Setting Default Tenors for Outright and Swap RFS on page 126 for more information about default tenors. Table 2-1 Tenor Shortcuts Tenor Can Be Default? Value TOD Yes Today (interpreted as TOD/SPOT when saved as a swap default) TOM Yes Tomorrow (interpreted as TOM/ SPOT when saved as a swap default) SPOT Yes Spot SN, S/N Yes Spot next. For swaps, enter this shortcut in the near leg field for near leg SPOT and far leg 1D. ON, O/N Yes Overnight. For swaps, enter this shortcut in the near leg field for near leg TOD and far leg TOM. TN, T/N Yes Tomorrow next. For swaps, enter this shortcut in the near leg field for near leg TOM and far leg SPOT. nimm No International Monetary Market (IMM) settlement dates. IMM dates are the third Wednesday of the last month of every quarter (March, June, September, December). Entering IMM results in the next IMM date on or after the spot date. Entering 2IMM results in two IMM dates after the spot date. The shortcuts SnIMM (spot + IMM) and TnIMM (tomorrow + IMM) are also supported for ease of use when entering swap requests. nd Yes n number of days (interpreted as SPOT/nD when saved as a swap default) nw Yes n number of weeks (interpreted as SPOT/nW when saved as a swap default)

60 2.8 Entering Dates and Tenors 60 Tenor Can Be Default? Value nm Yes n number of months (interpreted as SPOT/nM when saved as a swap default) ny Yes n number of years (interpreted as SPOT/nY when saved as a swap default) MMM Yes A three-letter abbreviation for the last trading day of a month (JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, DEC) Entering Tenors for Swaps in the RFS Module To conserve screen real estate, the currency pair groups in the RFS module have only one Value Date field for you to enter tenors. To enter a tenor for a swap, you need to separate the tenor of the near leg from the far leg with a slash. For example, to enter the tenors for a forward-forward swap with a near leg tenor of one month and a far leg tenor of three months, you would enter 1M/3M. If you enter a single tenor for a swap in the RFS module, Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes that the tenor is for the far leg and that the near leg tenor is spot Tenor Shortcuts for Overnights and Tomorrow Next Swaps When you enter a near leg tenor for an overnight or tomorrow next swap, Renesource Capital FX Professional automatically enters the far leg tenor for you: Table 2-2 Tenor Shortcuts for Overnights and Tomorrow Next Swaps You enter the near leg tenor SN, S/N ON, O/N TN, T/N Resulting tenor (near leg/far leg) SPOT/1D TOD/TOM TOM/SPOT Broken Dates In the RFS module and the RFS Full Book module, you can enter a specific value date for your outright and swap requests either by typing the date in the field or by using a calendar chooser. The dates you enter are subject to the following rules: All dates must be today or later. You cannot enter a past date. The far leg date must be after the near leg date. If you type a specific date, your entry must be in the format that you have chosen for date display. See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109. If you enter a date for a swap in the RFS module, Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes that the date is for the far leg and that the near leg tenor is spot.

61 2.9 Volatile Market Trading 61 To enter the value date with a calendar chooser in the RFS modules: 1. Click the calendar chooser button next to the value date field. The calendar chooser buttons are only active when you choose OR (outright) or SW (swap) from the trade type drop-down list. A calendar window opens: 2. Either click a date or use the arrow buttons to navigate to another month and click a date. 2.9 Volatile Market Trading During times of increased market volatility, you may find that the execution ranges that are effective in normal market conditions are too narrow and that the orders you submit go unfilled. You can use the Volatile Market toggle button in the toolbar to quickly increase the execution range of the market range orders that you submit from the trading modules to better ensure that your liquidity needs are met. Clicking the Volatile Market toggle button engages volatile market trading. The execution ranges that you have defined are multiplied by the Volatile Market Multiplier value in the Trading settings screen (Tools > Settings > Trading). See Setting the Volatile Market Multiplier on page 119. The trading modules clearly indicate when the multiplier is in effect by changing color and adding [Volatile Market] to the module title. If you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional to include execution ranges in prices display, then the increased execution ranges are also reflected in the prices in the FX Board module. Figure 2-1 Volatile Market Button Figure 2-2 Volatile Market Button Engaged

62 2.10 Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account 62 Figure 2-3 FX Board with Volatile Market Trading Engaged 2.10 Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account Depending on your system configuration and on your permissions, Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to trade on behalf of more than one organization or legal entity. NOTE: The organizations and legal entities that you can trade on behalf of are configured when your organization is provisioned. Contact Business Support to change the list of legal entities. To trade on behalf of another organization, choose the organization from the Org drop-down list in the toolbar. Your organization is shown in bold. Organizations in italic text are the organizations that you can trade on behalf of. Figure 2-1 Trading on Behalf of Another Organization The Acct drop-down list then updates with the eligible legal entities of the organization.

63 2.10 Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account 63 Figure 2-2 Trading on Behalf of Other Accounts Some legal entities may give you the option of rebooking the trade under a different legal entity after the trade is done. See Rebooking Outstanding Trades on page 68. You can determine the order of the organizations and accounts in the lists by clicking the Arrange button ( ) in the toolbar. The Arrange Orgs and Accounts popup window opens with tools that allow you to choose the order of items in the lists. Figure 2-3 Arrange Button Figure 2-4 Arrange Orgs and Accounts Window

64 CHAPTER 3 Monitoring Trading Activity 3.1 Introduction Renesource Capital FX Professional provides the following blotters so that you can better oversee your trading activity. The blotters you see depend on your user permissions: The Done Trades Blotter The Done Trades blotter lists completed trades. You can double-click a trade to open a Trade Ticket window that contains the details of a trade. See The Done Trades Blotter on page 64. Depending on how your organization is configured, you may also be able to access the Outstanding Trades blotter. See Rebooking Outstanding Trades on page 68. The Orders Blotter The Orders blotter shows the orders that have been submitted, their status, and any associated done trades. You can double-click an order to open an Order Summary window that contains the details of the order. See The Orders Blotter on page 69. The Positions Blotter The Positions blotter shows your current positions by currency with dynamically calculated values for each open position. You can roll your positions by clicking the Roll button to submit an RFS request. You can cover your positions by clicking the Cover button to submit a limit order. The time period you choose for this blotter determines the period of the spot MTM P/L amount displayed at the bottom of the Blotter module. See The Positions Blotter on page 78 and Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The Messages Blotter The Messages blotter shows the system messages resulting from trading actions, such as order submission, verification, and cancellation. See The Messages Blotter on page 97. The Exceptions Blotter The Exceptions blotter highlights system message that result from pending trades or delayed trade verifications. See The Exceptions Blotter on page The Done Trades Blotter The Done Trades blotter in the Blotter module lists all of your completed trades over a selected time period. Depending on how your organization is configured, the blotter may also include an Outstanding Trades blotter. See Rebooking Outstanding Trades on page 68. To display the Done Trades blotter, do one of the following:

65 3.2 The Done Trades Blotter 65 Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and click the Done Trades tab in the Blotter module. Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Done Trades tab in the Blotter module Working with Trades and Trade Tickets Buy trades are listed in green. Sell trades are listed in red. For swaps, the far and near legs are listed on separate rows with the same order and trade ID. For a description of the columns in the Done Trades blotter, see Done Trades Blotter Columns on page 213. You can perform the following actions in the Done Trades blotter: Viewing Trade Tickets on page 67 Viewing a Trade s History on page 67 Printing Trade Tickets on page 67 Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105 Rebooking Outstanding Trades on page Analyzing Trade Data The Done Trades blotter allows you to examine trade data in the following ways: Sorting, searching, and filtering o Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 o Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 (search does not apply to the Outstanding Trades blotter) o Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 o Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 o Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105 Reporting o Generating a Report of Blotter Items on page 101 o Printing Blotter Items on page 102 o Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105 Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142 Refreshing the Blotters on page Configuring the Done Trades Blotter You can configure how the Done Trades blotter displays trades and data in the following ways: Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142 Calculating the Net Position and Average Price for a Currency Pair on page 66

66 3.2 The Done Trades Blotter 66 Configuring Blotter Columns on page Calculating the Net Position and Average Price for a Currency Pair You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to display the net position and average price for selected trades in the Done Trades blotter. Showing net position/average price for specific trades 1. Open the Done Trades blotter by selecting Modules > Done Trades from the menu or by clicking the Blotter button in the toolbar and then clicking the Done Trades blotter tab in the Blotter module. 2. Right-click the top of the Blotter module and select Display Net Position/Average Price from the context menu. NOTE: Because Renesource Capital FX Professional executes spot trades, you must choose trades in a single currency pair. 3. Use the following techniques to select trades in the blotter: o Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select trades. Be sure to select trades with the same currency pair. The net position/average price only displays if you choose trades in a single currency pair. o Click and drag through the trades in the blotter. The first trade you click is the currency pair of the net position/average price. Only trades in this currency pair are selected as you drag through the blotter. The net position and average price displays for the trades you choose. 4. To include incoming trades in the selected currency pair, check the Include New Trades checkbox next to the net position/average price display. Show net position/average price for all trades in a single currency pair 1. Open the Done Trades blotter by selecting Modules > Done Trades from the menu or by clicking the Blotter button in the toolbar and then clicking the Done Trades blotter tab in the Blotter module. 2. Right-click the top of the Blotter module and select Display Net Position/Average Price from the context menu. 3. Right-click a trade in the currency pair you want and choose Select All <currency pair> from the context menu. The net position and average price displays for all of the trades in the currency pair. The Include New Trades checkbox is checked automatically to include incoming trades in the selected currency pair. Clearing your selection in the Done Trades blotter: Right-click the top of the Blotter module and select Unselect All from the context menu. How Renesource Capital FX Professional displays and calculates the net position and average price Renesource Capital FX Professional displays the position, the average price, and the number of

67 3.2 The Done Trades Blotter 67 trades selected to calculate these figures in the following format: Position for currency pair (x Trades) [+ or negative indicator] average_price Position for EUR/USD (14 Trades) How Renesource Capital FX Professional displays a negative position is determined by how you configure the negative indicator in the display format preferences. See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109. The values are calculated as: x = number of all selected trades net_position = sum of all selected buy trades the sum of all selected sell trades average_price = (average price of buy trades average price of sell trades) / net_position Viewing Trade Tickets You can view trade data (see Trade Ticket Data on page 214) by double-clicking trades in the Done Trades blotter or selecting a trade and pressing Enter. You can then print the ticket (see Printing Trade Tickets on page 67), view the history of the trade (see Viewing a Trade s History on page 67), or view a snapshot of the market Printing Trade Tickets You can print trade tickets from the Trade Ticket window and the Done Trades blotter. To print a trade ticket: 1. Open a trade ticket by double-clicking a trade in the Done Trades blotter. The Trade Ticket window appears. 2. Click the Print button ( ) or press Ctrl+P. The Print window appears. 3. Click OK. To print a trade ticket from the Done Trades blotter: 1. Click a trade in the Done Trades blotter. Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple trades. 2. Click the Print button ( ) at the top of the Done Trades blotter. If the Print button is not visible, click the More button ( ) and then click the Print button. The Print window appears. 3. Click OK Viewing a Trade s History You can view the trading events associated with a particular trade from the trade s ticket.

68 3.2 The Done Trades Blotter 68 To view a trade s history: 1. Open the trade s ticket by double-clicking the trade in the Done Trades blotter or selecting the trade and pressing Enter. The Trade Ticket window opens. 2. Click the View History button ( ). The Trade History window opens with a table of trading events associated with the trade. You can then print the history by clicking the Print button ( CSV file by clicking the Download button ( ). ) or download the history to a Viewing a Market Snapshot You can view a snapshot of the market that shows the prices in the currency pair at the moment the trade s price was taken. To see a trade s market snapshot: 1. Open the Done Trades blotter in the Blotter module (Modules > Done Trades or click the Done Trades tab in the Blotter module). 2. Open a trade ticket by double-clicking a trade in the Done Trades blotter or selecting a trade and pressing Enter. 3. Click the View Market Snapshot link in the ticket. You can print the snapshot by clicking the Print button ( file by clicking the Download button ( ). ) or download the snapshot to a CSV Rebooking Outstanding Trades An outstanding trade is a trade done on behalf of specific accounts (legal entity), allowing you to rebook the trade. NOTE: Your organization must be configured to allow trading on behalf of an account and to allow rebooking of outstanding trades. The list of legal entities that trigger outstanding trades is configured when your organization is provisioned. Contact Business Support to change the list of legal entities. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page 62 for more information about trading on behalf of an account. If you execute a trade while trading on behalf of an applicable legal entity, the trade is entered in the Outstanding Trades and Done Trades blotter. You can then choose to rebook the trade with different legal entity. Figure 3-1 Outstanding Trades Blotter

69 3.3 The Orders Blotter 69 Outstanding trades appear in both the Outstanding Trades blotter and the Done Trades blotter. You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to select outstanding trades automatically as they are added so that you can rebook them with a minimum of input. See Put Focus Automatically on New Outstanding Trades on page 147. To rebook an outstanding trade: 1. Open the Blotter module (Click Blotter in the toolbar or select Modules > Blotter from the menu) and click the Outstanding Trades tab. 2. In the Outstanding Trades blotter, choose a new counterparty from the drop-down list in the trades Account column. 3. Click the Done button. Renesource Capital FX Professional rebooks the trade with the new counterparty and removes the trade from the Outstanding Trades blotter. 3.3 The Orders Blotter The Orders blotter in the Blotter module lists submitted orders and their associated trades, if any. To display the Orders blotter, do one of the following: Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module Using the Blotter Buy orders are listed in green. Sell orders are listed in red. You can cancel an order from the Orders blotter by clicking the order s OFF button in the Cancel column of the blotter. Orders with one or more associated trades have an expand/collapse button next to their order ID ( / ). Click this button to show or hide the done trades that have resulted from the order submission. You can perform the following actions in the Orders blotter: Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace on page 174 Copying Orders on page 46 Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180 Viewing Order Summaries on page 70 Viewing an Order s History on page 70 Printing Order Summaries on page 71 Draft and Imported Orders on page 72 Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105

70 3.3 The Orders Blotter Analyzing Order Data The Orders blotter allows you to examine trade data in the following ways: Sorting, searching, and filtering o Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 o Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 o Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 o Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 o Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105 Reporting o Generating a Report of Blotter Items on page 101 o Printing Blotter Items on page 102 o Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105 Refreshing the Blotters on page Configuring the Orders Blotter You can configure how the Orders blotter displays orders and data in the following ways: Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 Configuring Blotter Columns on page Viewing Order Summaries You can view a summary of an order s data by double-clicking orders in the Orders blotter or selecting an order and pressing Enter. You can then print the summary or view the order s history. See Printing Order Summaries on page 71 and Viewing an Order s History on page Viewing an Order s History You can view the trading events associated with a particular order from the order summary. To view an order s history: 1. Open the order s summary by double-clicking the order in the Orders blotter or selecting the order and pressing Enter. The Order Summary window opens. 2. Click the View History button ( ). The Order History window opens with a table of trading events associated with the order. You can then print the history by clicking the Print button ( CSV file by clicking the Download button ( ). ) or download the history to a

71 3.3 The Orders Blotter Printing Order Summaries You can print order information from the Order Summary window and the Orders blotter. To print an order summary: 1. Open an order summary by double-clicking an order in the Orders blotter. The Order Summary window appears. 2. Click the Print button ( ) or press Ctrl+P. The Print window appears. 3. Click OK. To print an order summary from the Orders blotter: 1. Click an order in the Orders blotter. Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple orders. 2. Click the Print button ( ) at the top of the Orders blotter. If the Print button is not visible, click the More button ( ) and then click the Print button. The Print window appears. 3. Click OK Show Orders by Status You can choose to display only orders with the following status in the Orders blotter: Active: Tradable and matched according to their order trigger and market prices. Inactive: Completely filled, expired, or cancelled. Draft: Imported as draft orders without activation. See Draft and Imported Orders on page 72. Suspended: Orders that have not been completely filled or expired and are not being matched. See Suspending and Resuming Orders on page 179. To show only orders of a certain status in the Orders blotter: 1. Open the Orders blotter: o Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. The Order Summary window opens. 2. Select the order status that you want to see in the blotter from the Show drop-down list: o All o Active (shows all active orders regardless of the period you choose in the Period drop-down list) o Inactive o Draft o Suspended

72 3.3 The Orders Blotter 72 The Orders blotter updates to show only those orders with the status you selected Draft and Imported Orders Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you the added flexibility to import orders from a The Orders Blotter on page 69. Importing Orders on page 72 File Format for Importing and Exporting Orders on page 75 Activating Draft Orders on page 73 Editing Draft Orders on page 73 Removing Draft Orders on page 77 Exporting Draft Orders on page 74 Importing Orders You can import orders from a file. Importing orders allows you enter orders in whatever application is most convenient for you and then add them in a batch to Renesource Capital FX Professional. Orders can either activated immediately when you import them or can be imported as draft orders and later activated individually. Draft orders remain in the Orders blotter until you activate or remove them. See Activating Draft Orders on page 73 and Removing Draft Orders on page 77. See File Format for Importing and Exporting Orders on page 75 for details about the import file. To import orders into Renesource Capital FX Professional: 1. Open the Orders blotter: o Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. 2. Click the Import Draft Orders button ( ). The Import Draft Orders dialog opens. 3. Either enter the path of the import file in the File Name field or click Browse and choose the file that contains the orders that you want to import. See File Format for Importing and Exporting Orders on page 75 for details about the import file. 4. Choose either to import your orders as inactive draft orders and then activate them later or to activate the orders as they are imported: o Check the Activate on Import checkbox to submit your imported orders immediately. Your imported orders are added to the Orders module as active orders. You can import a maximum of 10 active orders. o Leave the Activate on Import checkbox unchecked to import your orders as draft orders in the Orders blotter. Draft orders are shown in gray text. You can activate the draft orders later. See Activating Draft Orders on page 73. You can import a maximum of 100 draft orders. If the Orders blotter is configured to show only active or inactive orders, your newly

73 3.3 The Orders Blotter 73 imported draft orders are not displayed. Renesource Capital FX Professional opens a dialog reminding you to show draft orders or order of all statuses. See Show Orders by Status on page Click OK. Activating Draft Orders If you do not activate imported order automatically when you import them, the orders are added to the Orders blotter as draft orders. You must activate these draft orders explicitly for them to take effect in the system. You can activate a maximum of 10 draft orders at a time. If you have permission to view trades for your organization and activate another user s draft order, the active order is submitted in your name. See Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105. To activate draft orders: 1. Open the Orders blotter: o Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. 2. Select the draft orders that you want to activate. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select more than one draft order. You can select up to 10 draft orders. NOTE: Make sure that the Orders blotter is configured to show draft orders. See Show Orders by Status on page 71. You can also sort or filter the column data to group your draft orders for easier activation. See Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 and Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page Click the Activate Draft Orders button or right-click the orders that you have selected in the blotter and select Activate Draft from the context menu. The selected orders are activated, added to the Orders module, and are executable. Editing Draft Orders You can edit the draft orders in the Orders blotter. Editing draft orders allows you to change your drafts without having to remove them and import them again. You can edit one draft order at a time. To edit a draft order: 1. Open the Orders blotter: o Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module.

74 3.3 The Orders Blotter 74 o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. 2. Right-click the draft order that you want to edit and select Edit Draft from the context menu. NOTE: Make sure that the Orders blotter is configured to show draft orders. See Show Orders by Status on page 71. You can also sort or filter the column data to group your draft orders for easier activation. See Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 and Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page Edit the details of the order. For more information about entering the details of various types of orders, see Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page If you want to activate the order, click Activate. Otherwise, to save the edited draft order for activation or export later, click Save. See Activating Draft Orders on page 73 and Exporting Draft Orders on page 74. Exporting Draft Orders You can export draft orders to a CSV file. This is useful if you have edited a draft order in Renesource Capital FX Professional and want to save it to a file for importing later. See Editing Draft Orders on page 73. To export draft orders: 1. Open the Orders blotter: o Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. 2. Select the draft orders that you want to export. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select more than one draft order. NOTE: Make sure that the Orders blotter is configured to show draft orders. See Show Orders by Status on page 71. You can also sort the column or filter the column data to group your draft orders for easier activation. See Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 and Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page Right-click the orders and select Export Draft Order from the context menu or click the Download button ( ). A Save File dialog opens. 4. Choose the directory in which you want to save the file and enter the file name. 5. Click Save. You orders are saved as a CSV file. A dialog opens asking if you want to open the file. 6. Do one of the following: o Click No to close the dialog and return to Renesource Capital FX Professional. o Click Yes to open the file in the default application for opening CSV files, usually Microsoft Excel.

75 3.3 The Orders Blotter 75 File Format for Importing and Exporting Orders Renesource Capital FX Professional uses CSV files for order import and export. Each order is represented by a single line of comma-separated data in the file. Your import file can contain up to 100 orders. Your import file must contain the fields in exactly the same order as shown in the examples and table below. Header on page 75 Empty Fields on page 75 Extra Data on page 75 Fields on page 76 Examples on page 77 Header A header line is not required. Renesource Capital FX Professional ignores any header in your import file. Empty Fields You cannot omit any field in the import file. If a particular field is null because it is optional or not applicable, you must indicate the empty field with adjacent commas or adjacent double-quotes between commas. Extra Data Renesource Capital FX Professional ignores any fields or characters after the last field in an order record. This allows you to add other information to the import file for your organization s use.

76 3.3 The Orders Blotter 76 Fields Table 3-1 Draft Order Import/Export Fields Field Req d Description Example Values Currency Pair Y The currency pair of the order EUR/JPY Buy/Sell Y Whether the order is a buy or sell order Buy Sell Type Y The type of order. See Order Types on page 181. Hidden/Displayed N This field only applies to limit orders. Whether the order is to be managed locally by Renesource Capital FX Professional (hidden) or shown to other market participants (displayed). See Displayed and Hidden Orders Compared on page 186. If you leave this field empty, the default value is Hidden. Trigger Rate Rate Y (stop orders only. Not applicable to limit and market orders.) Y (limit and stop orders only. Not applicable to market orders.) This field only applies to stop orders. The trigger rate of the order. See Order Trigger Types on page 183 and Stop Orders on page 189. This field only applies to limit and stop orders. The order rate. If the precision of the imported rate is greater than the convention for the currency pair, Renesource Capital FX Professional rounds the rate to the correct precision. Order Amount Y The order amount of the dealt currency. You can enter the actual amount or one of the following amount shortcuts: K or k for thousands (250K) M or m for millions (50.5M) B or b for billions (1.25B) If you use thousands separator characters to format the amount, you must enclose the amount in double quotes. LMT ( Limit Orders on page 188) SL ( Stop Orders on page 189) MKT ( Market Orders on page 188) Hidden (default) Displayed Bid Offer (for EUR/JPY) 29,690,000

77 3.3 The Orders Blotter 77 Field Req d Description Example Values Show Amount N This field only applies to displayed limit orders (iceberg orders). The display size of the hidden order. See display size. If you leave this field empty, the default value is 0 (zero) meaning that the order amount and show amount are equal. You can enter the actual amount or one of the following amount shortcuts: K or k for thousands (250K) M or m for millions (50.5M) B or b for billions (1.25B) If you use thousands separator characters to format the amount, you must enclose the amount in double quotes. 5M Trailing Pips N Not supported in this release. 10 Market Range N This field only applies to market orders. The price range in pips within which your order is matched. See Market Orders on page 188. The range of pips can be an integer value from 0 (zero) to 999, inclusive. If you leave this field empty, the default value is 5. Sweep Market N This field only applies to market orders. Whether to sweep the market (true) or not (false). If you leave this field empty, the default value is True. Strategy N The order s execution type. See Execution Types Described on page 114. If you leave this field empty, the default value is BestPrice. 5 True (default) False BestPrice (default) VWAP Mkt Dealt Currency Y The dealt currency of the order EUR Examples Example 3-1 Example 1: Limit order, 1M EUR/USD, hidden, dealt currency EUR "EUR/USD","Sell","LMT","Hidden",""," ","1,000,000.00","","","","","","EUR", Example 3-2 Example 2: Limit order, 50M EUR/USD, displayed with 10M display size, VWAP execution, dealt currency EUR "EUR/USD","Sell","LMT","Displayed",""," ","50,000,000.00","10,000,000.00","","","","VWAP","EUR", Example 3-3 Example 3: Market order, 40M EUR/USD, sweep the market turned off (false), dealt currency EUR "EUR/USD","Sell","MKT","Hidden","","","40,000,000.00","","","20","False","MKT","EUR", Removing Draft Orders You can remove draft orders from the Orders blotter.

78 3.4 The Positions Blotter 78 If you edit a draft order and then remove it, your changes are lost. See Editing Draft Orders on page 73. To remove draft orders: 1. Open the Orders blotter: o Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Orders tab in the Blotter module. 2. Select the draft orders that you want to remove. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select more than one draft order. NOTE: Make sure that the Orders blotter is showing draft orders. See Show Orders by Status on page 71. You can also sort the column or filter the column data to group your draft orders for easier activation. See Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 and Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page Right-click the orders and choose Remove Draft from the context menu. The draft orders are removed from the Orders blotter. Any changes that you made to the draft orders are lost. See Editing Draft Orders on page The Positions Blotter The Positions blotter in the Blotter module shows the net result of trading a currency pair in the market. The blotter includes tools that allow you to cover your positions with the click of a button. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. NOTE: If you trade on behalf of other organizations, the Positions blotter does not consider these trades when calculating your positions. To display the Positions blotter, do one of the following: Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and click the Positions tab in the Blotter module. Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Positions tab in the Blotter module Working with Positions For a description of the information displayed in the blotter, see Viewing Positions in the Blotter on page 79. You can perform the following actions in the Positions blotter: Covering Your Open Positions on page 94 Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94 Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96

79 3.4 The Positions Blotter 79 Starting a New Session in the Positions Blotter on page 96 Spot Mark-to-Market Profit/Loss Display on page 102 Sorting, searching, and filtering o Viewing Positions in the Blotter on page 79 o Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 o Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 o Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 o Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 o Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105 Reporting o Generating a Report of Blotter Items on page 101 o Printing Blotter Items on page 102 o Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105 Refreshing the Blotters on page Configuring the Positions Blotter You can configure how the Positions blotter displays positions in the following ways: Choosing the Behavior of the Positions Blotter When the Trade Date Rolls on page 146 Choosing the Order Type for Covering Positions on page 147 Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 Configuring Blotter Columns on page Viewing Positions in the Blotter The contents of the Positions blotter depends on how you have chosen to group positions in the Group By drop-down list and the time period you choose from the Period drop-down list. Time Periods and Trade Dates for Positions on page 79 Grouping Trades into Positions on page 80 NOTE: If you trade on behalf of other organizations, the Positions blotter does not consider these trades when calculating your positions. Time Periods and Trade Dates for Positions The Positions blotter considers recently done trades when calculating your positions with respect to a particular time period and value date. The following table describes the value date range of the trades included when you select a period from the Period drop-down list:

80 3.4 The Positions Blotter 80 Table 3-1 Time Periods and Trade Dates for Positions Period Trades Displayed Session-time Done in the current session Session-Today Done today Session-Yesterday Done yesterday Session-2 days Done today and yesterday T+0 Settling today only T+1 Settling today and tomorrow T+2 Settling today through the next 2 days T+3 Settling today through the next 3 days T+4 Settling today through the next 4 days T+5 Settling today through the next 5 days Today Everything settling after today Yesterday Everything settling today and after Grouping Trades into Positions The following group or view choices show the positions summarized by currency pair with all views except Summary allowing you to expand the positions to see more specific information: Summary View on page 80: A summary of positions for each currency pair (not expandable) Trades View on page 82: The underlying trades Delta View on page 84: The underlying trades ordered from newest to oldest showing the position delta, the incremental position attributed to each trade Counterparty View on page 86: Positions according to counterparty Trader View on page 88: Positions according to the trader user. Only available to users who have permission to view trades and messages for their organization. See Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105. Account View on page 90: Positions according to the account that booked the trades. Organization View on page 92: Positions according to the organization for which the trade was booked. Summary View When you choose Summary from the Group By drop-down list, the Positions blotter shows a summary of your positions by currency pair. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Summary view includes the following columns of data:

81 3.4 The Positions Blotter 81 Table 3-1 Summary View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount Position Rate Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Avg Rate Close Rate The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount) The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The average rate for all trades during the position s session. The value is calculated as: Avg Rate = (Total term amount buy trades - Total term amount sell trades) / (Total base amount buy trades - Total base amount sell trades) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds.

82 3.4 The Positions Blotter 82 Column Name Realized P/L Unrealized P/L Spot MTM P/L (currency) Cover button Description The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds. The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds. Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Roll button Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96. Trades View When you choose Trades from the Group By drop-down list, the Positions blotter shows your positions for each currency pair and the underlying trades of the position. Swap trades are shown as two trades, one against the value date of each leg. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Trades view includes the following columns of data: Table 3-1 Trades View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date Trade ID Execution Time Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded The IDs of the trades that contribute to the position The date/time that the underlying trades were executed

83 3.4 The Positions Blotter 83 Column Name Position Description The net position in the currency pair, positive indicating a net long position and negative indicating a net short position Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount Position Rate Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Close Rate Realized P/L The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount) The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds. The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades

84 3.4 The Positions Blotter 84 Column Name Unrealized P/L Spot MTM P/L (currency) Cover button Description The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds. The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds. Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Roll button Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96. Delta View When you choose Delta from the Group By drop-down list, the Position Blotter module shows the underlying trades ordered from newest to oldest showing the position delta, the incremental position attributed to each trade Swap trades are shown as two trades, one against the value date of each leg. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Delta view includes the following columns of data: Table 3-1 Delta View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date Trade ID Execution Time Position Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded The IDs of the trades that contribute to the position The date/time that the underlying trades were executed The net position in the currency pair, positive indicating a net long position and negative indicating a net short position

85 3.4 The Positions Blotter 85 Column Name Description Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount Position Rate Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Close Rate Realized P/L The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount) The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds. The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades

86 3.4 The Positions Blotter 86 Column Name Unrealized P/L Spot MTM P/L (currency) Cover button Description The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds. The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds. Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Roll button Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96. Counterparty View When you choose Cpty from the Group By drop-down list, the Positions blotter shows your positions in each currency pair grouped by counterparty. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Cpty view includes the following columns of data: Table 3-1 Counterparty View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date CPTY Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded The IDs of the counterparties whose trades contribute to the position Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount)

87 3.4 The Positions Blotter 87 Column Name Position Rate Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Close Rate Realized P/L Unrealized P/L Spot MTM P/L (currency) Description The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds. The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds. The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds.

88 3.4 The Positions Blotter 88 Column Name Cover button Description Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Roll button Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96. Trader View This view is only available to users with Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105. When you choose Trader from the Group By drop-down list, the Position Blotter module shows your positions in each currency pair grouped by the trader who dealt the position. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Trader view includes the following columns of data: Table 3-1 Trader View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date Trader Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded The IDs of your organization s traders whose trades contribute to the position Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount)

89 3.4 The Positions Blotter 89 Column Name Position Rate Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Close Rate Realized P/L Unrealized P/L Spot MTM P/L (currency) Description The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds. The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds. The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds.

90 3.4 The Positions Blotter 90 Column Name Cover button Description Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Roll button Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96. Account View When you choose Account from the Group By drop-down list, the Positions blotter shows your positions in each currency pair grouped by the account that booked the trades. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Account view includes the following columns of data: Table 3-1 Account View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date Account Cpty Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded The IDs of the accounts that booked the trades that make up the position The IDs of the counterparty organizations whose trades contribute to the position Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount)

91 3.4 The Positions Blotter 91 Column Name Position Rate Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Close Rate Realized P/L Unrealized P/L Spot MTM P/L (currency) Description The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds. The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds. The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds.

92 3.4 The Positions Blotter 92 Column Name Cover button Description Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Roll button Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page 96. Organization View When you choose Organization from the Group By drop-down list, the Positions blotter shows your positions in each currency pair grouped by the organization for which the trade was booked. You can configure the view to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. By default, the Organization view includes the following columns of data: Table 3-1 Organization View Columns Column Name CCY Pair Value Date Description The currency pair of the position. Click the expand/collapse button ( / ) to show or hide the trades that contribute to the position. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The value date of the trades, blank until the currency pair is expanded Organization The IDs of the organizations for which the trades that make up the position were booked Cpty The IDs of the counterparty organizations whose trades contribute to the position Long/Short Long if the position is positive indicating a net long position. Long positions are displayed in green text. Short if the position is negative indicating a net short position. Short positions are displayed in red text. Blank if the open amount is zero. Neutral positions are displayed in black text. Net Amount The net open amount in the base currency, calculated as: Net Amount = ABS (total buy amount total sell amount)

93 3.4 The Positions Blotter 93 Column Name Description Position Rate The weighted average buy or sell rate of the current position. Trades are treated on a first-in-firstout basis, meaning that only the rates of the latest trades that contribute to the open amount are used. Renesource Capital FX Professional considers buy trades as they were executed, moving back through trades according to the time they were executed, until the net balance is equal to or less than the net open amount. For example, if the net open amount is 4M buy and the most recent buy trades from newest to oldest are: 1. Buy Buy Buy Only trades #1 and #2 are considered for the position rate (2M+6M > 4M net open amount). Only 2M of trade#2 is considered because its 6M is greater than the net open amount after trade#1 is 2M (4M net open amount 2M = 2M net open amount). The position rate is then calculated as: Position Rate = (trade#1 amount*trade#1 rate) + (2M*trade#2 rate) Position Rate = (2M*1.1216) + (2M*1.1214) / 4M = Net Buy Amount Avg Buy Rate Net Sell Amount Avg Sell Rate Close Rate The total amount of the base currency purchased during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all buy trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Buy Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The total amount of base currency sold during the position s session. The weighted average rate for all sell trades during the position s session. For three trades, this would be calculated as: Avg Sell Rate = (amount1*rate1)+(amount2*rate2)+(amount3*rate3) / (amount1+amount2+amount3) The market rate at the position s size to close the position. This column is updated every two seconds. Realized P/L The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking all trades (or portions thereof) that are closed and computing the profit for each pair of opposing buy/sell trades: Realized P/L for a pair of opposing trades = realized P/L of closed amount * (sell rate buy rate) / rate of the last trade of the pair Total realized P/L = sum of realized P/L for each pair of opposed trades Unrealized P/L The profit or loss in the base currency determined by taking the position s currency pair rate against the current market rate at the position amount. Essentially, the unrealized P/L is the profit or loss if the position was closed at the current close rate. If the net open position is buy then: Unrealized P/L = (close rate position rate)/close rate * net open amount If the net open position is sell then: Unrealized P/L = (position rate close rate)/close rate * net open amount The column is updated every two seconds.

94 3.4 The Positions Blotter 94 Column Name Spot MTM P/L (currency) Cover button Roll button Description The spot mark-to-market profit or loss (spot MTM P/L) amount denominated in the home currency. See Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. The column is updated every two seconds. Click this button to place an order in the base currency to reverse the net open amount for that currency pair and cover the open position. The button is not displayed in rows where the net open position is zero. The button is disabled if VWAP is 0 for any currency pair. See Covering Your Open Positions on page 94. Click this button to open an RFS Full Book module with the near leg set to close the current position. The button is displayed for positions with value dates in the future. See Rolling Your Open Positions on page Covering Your Open Positions All views of the Positions blotter include Cover buttons that allow you to submit an order in a position s base currency to reverse the net open amount and cover the open position. The button is disabled in rows where the net open position is zero or if VWAP is 0 (zero) for any currency pair. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. Renesource Capital FX Professional covers your position by submitting a market range order with VWAP execution and GTT time in force. To cover an open position: 1. Open the Positions blotter by doing one of the following: o Select Modules > Positions from the menu. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Positions tab in the Blotter module. 2. If you do not see a Cover button for the position that you want to cover, click the expand/collapse button ( / ) in the CCY Pair column to show the trades that contribute to the position. 3. Click the Cover button of the open position that you want to close. 4. If you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional to require confirmation for cover requests, a window opens asking you to confirm your cover request. Click Yes to confirm your request and cover the position. See Requiring Confirmation for Covering Positions on page 146. Renesource Capital FX Professional submits an order to cover your position Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions A take profit/stop loss (TP/SL) order is a type of linked order that consists of a limit order that allows you to take profit if the market moves in your favor on a position and a stop order if the market moves against your position. You can submit TP/SL orders from the Positions blotter and the Orders module. All views of the Positions blotter include TP/SL buttons that allow you to quickly submit TP/SL orders for your positions. Filled and partially filled orders in the Orders module list also include a TP/SL button.

95 3.4 The Positions Blotter 95 The button is disabled for positions where the net open position is zero or if VWAP is 0 (zero) for any currency pair. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. To submit a TP/SL order for a position from the Positions blotter: 1. Open the Positions blotter by doing one of the following: o Select Modules > Positions from the menu. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Positions tab in the Blotter module. 2. If you do not see a TP/SL button for the position that you want, click the expand/collapse button ( / ) in the CCY Pair column to show the trades that contribute to the position. 3. Click the TP/SL button of the open position. A dialog opens asking you to confirm the order creation. 4. Click Yes. Renesource Capital FX Professional opens the Advanced Orders module with the trade and price information from your position. 5. Set the price of the limit component order in Limit Price field. 6. Set the price of the stop component order in Stop Price field. 7. Select either Bid or Offer from the Trigger drop-down list. This is the side that triggers rate execution. 8. (Optional) Choose the time in force for the component order from the Time in Force drop-down list. See Time in Force on page 184. o Select DAY for a day order. o Select GTC for a good till cancelled order. 9. Click Add. Renesource Capital FX Professional adds the limit and stop component orders to the list. 10. Click Submit All. The order appears in the Orders module as separate entries in the order list with the link ID indicating their contingency link. You can amend individual component orders ( Amending Orders on page 174) or fill a component order as a market order ( Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180). To submit a TP/SL order for a position from the Orders module: 1. In the Orders module list, click the TP/SL button of the filled or partially filled order. A dialog opens asking you to confirm the order creation. 2. Click Yes. Renesource Capital FX Professional opens the Advanced Orders module with the trade and price information from your position. 3. Set the price of the limit component order in Limit Price field. 4. Set the price of the stop component order in Stop Price field. 5. Select either Bid or Offer from the Trigger drop-down list. This is the side that triggers rate execution. 6. (Optional) Choose the time in force for the component order from the Time in Force drop-down list. See Time in Force on page 184. o Select DAY for a day order. o Select GTC for a good till cancelled order.

96 3.4 The Positions Blotter Click Add. Renesource Capital FX Professional adds the limit and stop component orders to the list. 8. Click Submit All. The order appears in the Orders module as separate entries in the order list with the link ID indicating their contingency link. You can amend individual component orders ( Amending Orders on page 174) or fill a component order as a market order ( Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180) Rolling Your Open Positions All views of the Positions blotter include Roll buttons that allow you to submit an RFS request to roll an open position. When you click the button, Renesource Capital FX Professional opens an RFS Full Book module with a near leg set to close the current open position and a far leg set to open another position. You can configure the default tenor for the far leg. See Setting Default Tenors for Rolling Positions on page 126. The value date of the new position is one day later the current position s value date. The Roll button is enabled only for positions with a value date after the current trade date. To roll an open position: 1. Open the Positions blotter by doing one of the following: o Select Modules > Positions from the menu. o Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Positions tab in the Blotter module. 2. If you do not see a Roll button for the position that you want to roll, click the expand/collapse button ( / ) in the CCY Pair column to show the trades that contribute to the position. 3. Click the Roll button of the open position that you want to close. An RFS Full Book module opens with the details of your roll entered as an RFS request. 4. Confirm the details of your RFS request and click Get Price. Within a few seconds, the RFS Full Book module shows the incoming price streams. 5. Click a price to execute a trade and roll your position Starting a New Session in the Positions Blotter The Positions blotter includes a New Session button that you use when you need to track your position for a specific period of time. To start a new positions session manually, click the New Session button in the blotter. When you start a new positions session, the previous session is closed. Renesource Capital FX Professional maintains your current positions session for a trading day. When you log in and out, your positions session is preserved until you manually start a new session or until the trading date changes.

97 3.5 The Messages Blotter 97 All intraday positions sessions that you create are made available from the Period drop-down lists for future reference throughout the trading day. The list of intraday sessions is cleared when the trading date changes. NOTE: You cannot create an empty positions session. In other words, there must be at least one trade in the current session in order for you to create a new session. If you try to create an empty session, Renesource Capital FX Professional open a popup window explaining the failure and the current session remains open. 3.5 The Messages Blotter The Messages blotter in the Blotter module shows all the trading events for all of your Renesource Capital FX Professional sessions. To display the Messages blotter, do one of the following: Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and click the Messages tab in the Blotter module. Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Messages tab in the Blotter module Working with Messages For a description of the information recorded in the messages, see Messages Blotter Columns on page 223. For an explanation of the different colors in the module, see Messages Blotter Font Colors on page 223. You can perform the following actions in the Messages blotter: Sorting, searching, and filtering o Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 o Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 o Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 o Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 o Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105 Reporting o Generating a Report of Blotter Items on page 101 o Printing Blotter Items on page 102 o Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105 Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142 Refreshing the Blotters on page Configuring the Messages Blotter You can configure how the Messages blotter displays messages in the following ways:

98 3.6 The Exceptions Blotter 98 Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142 Configuring Blotter Columns on page The Exceptions Blotter The messages shown in the Exceptions blotter in the Blotter module are a subset of the messages in the Messages blotter. The Exceptions blotter collects and highlights these messages to ensure that you do not miss important messages about pending trades and delayed trade verifications or rejections. The following events appear in the Exceptions blotter: Order Matching Pending Order Submission Pending Confirmation Delayed To display the Exceptions blotter, do one of the following: Select Modules > Blotter from the menu and then click the Exceptions tab in the Blotter module. Click the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar and then click the Exceptions tab in the Blotter module. Click the exception indicator in the status bar ( ) Working with Exceptions For a description of the information recorded in the messages, see Exceptions Blotter Columns on page 224. You can perform the following actions in the Exceptions blotter: Sorting, searching, and filtering o Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 o Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 o Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 o Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 o Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105 Reporting o Generating a Report of Blotter Items on page 101 o Printing Blotter Items on page 102 o Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105 Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142 Refreshing the Blotters on page 101

99 3.7 Minimizing/Restoring the Blotter Module and Showing Hidden Blotter Tools Configuring the Exceptions Blotter You can configure how the Exceptions blotter displays messages in the following ways: Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 Configuring Blotter Columns on page Minimizing/Restoring the Blotter Module and Showing Hidden Blotter Tools To minimize the Blotter module, click the Minimize toggle button at the top of the module ( the Blotter button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar. To restore the module, click the Restore toggle button at the top of the module ( button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional toolbar. ) or ) or the Blotter As you resize the Renesource Capital FX Professional screen horizontally and Blotter tools such as the Period drop-down list are hidden, this button changes to the Blotter Tools button ( ). Click the button to open a menu that contains the Blotter tools that are hidden. Figure 3-1 Menu Showing Hidden Blotter Tools 3.8 The Account Details Module The Account Details module shows your credit and P/L status for each liquidity provider updated every 5 seconds. To open the Account Details module, click the Account Details button in the toolbar or select Modules > Account Details Module Data The module displays the following data:

100 3.9 Generating Trade Reports 100 Table 3-1 Account Details Module Data Data Account Balance Unrealized P/L Current Balance Margin Used Margin Available Description The total amount of funds in your account available for margining The profit and loss from your organization s perspective as computed from unsettled trades with a value date greater than the current date Your organization s account balance plus your unrealized P/L. If you are in profit, your current balance exceeds your account balance. Conversely, if you have made a loss, the current balance is less than your account balance. The amount of the available margin used by existing unsettled trades. This value is calculated as your total credit utilization modified by your margin factor. The notional value available for trading. This value is calculated as your account balance modified by your trading suspension percentage, minus your unrealized P/L minus your margin used. Once this value reaches zero, your trading is suspended Account Calculations The following example illustrates how the values are calculated and displayed in the Account module. Example 3-1 Account Module Calculations Assume the following: Available credit: 10,000,000 Used credit: 5,000,000 Margin factor: 10 P/L: 1,000,000 Trading suspension percentage: 98% The Account module in Renesource Capital FX Professional displays: Account balance: 10,000,000 Unrealized P/L: 1,000,000 Current Balance: 11,000,000 Margin Used: (5,000,000 / 10) = 500,000 Margin Available: ((10,000,000 * 0.98) + 1,000,000) 500,000 = 10,300, Generating Trade Reports You can generate reports from trades in Renesource Capital FX Professional according to the following criteria: Currency pairs (Reports > Trades > By Ccy Pair) Counterparty (Reports > Trades > By Cpty) Trader (Reports > Trades > By Trader)

101 3.10 Generating a Report of Blotter Items 101 Date (Reports > Trades > By Date) Rejected (Reports > Trades > By Ccy Pair) Menu settings generate reports in common date ranges from today to a maximum of one week. To generate a report, select the report and the date range (for example, Reports > Trades > By Ccy Pair > 2 Days). A window opens with your report results. You can also generate custom reports according to the specific criteria you choose: 1. Open the Reports windows (Reports > Trades > Custom). 2. Specify your report criteria. 3. Click OK. A window opens with your report results. In the report results window, you can print the results by clicking the Print button ( the results to a CSV file by clicking the Download button ( ). ) or download 3.10 Generating a Report of Blotter Items Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to generate a report from the various blotters. Your report includes only the data as displayed in the blotter, subject to the columns you have configured in the Blotter module and by any active filters or searches. See Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter on page 144, Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103, and Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 for more information. To generate a report of blotter data: 1. Select the items from the table in the blotter using Ctrl+click and Shift+click. To generate a report from all items in the table, make sure that no items are selected. 2. Click the Report button ( ). If the button is not visible, click the More button ( ) to show a menu with the Report button. The Report Viewer window opens with your selected items. You can now print the report by clicking the Print button ( file by clicking the Download button ( ). ) and download the report as a CSV 3.11 Refreshing the Blotters Blotters are refreshed automatically. Depending on the speed of your network connection and network conditions, you may want to refresh the contents of a blotter manually. To refresh a blotter manually, click the Refresh button:. If the button is not visible, click the More button ( ) to show a menu with the Refresh button.

102 3.12 Printing Blotter Items Printing Blotter Items Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to print a report of the items in the various blotters. Your printout includes only the data as displayed in the blotter, subject to the columns you have configured in the Blotter module and by any active filters or searches. See Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter on page 144, Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103, and Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 for more information. To print blotter data: 1. Select the items from the table in the blotter using Ctrl+click and Shift+click. To print all items in the table, make sure that no items are selected. 2. Click the Print button ( ) at the top of the Blotter module. If the Print button is not visible, click the More button ( ) to show a menu with the Print button. The Print window appears. 3. Click OK Spot Mark-to-Market Profit/Loss Display Renesource Capital FX Professional calculates and displays your spot mark-to-market profit and loss (spot MTM P/L) in several places: In the Positions blotter for each position and reports generated from the Positions blotter In a row at the bottom of the Blotter module for all positions Configuring You choose the period of the spot MTM P/L calculations and the currency in which the amount is displayed (the home currency). See Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 and Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109. You also choose the format in which the amount is displayed. See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 for details Calculating Renesource Capital FX Professional calculates the spot MTM P/L amount for each currency as follows: 1. Determine residual amounts, if any: IF net buy amount > net sell amount THEN net buy amount net sell amount = residual sell amount ELSE IF net buy amount < net sell amount THEN net sell amount net buy amount = residual buy amount 2. Calculate the net P/L:

103 3.14 Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Blotter Data 103 P/L in net = (net sell amount * average sell rate) (net buy amount * average buy rate) + (residual sell amount * current bid rate) (residual buy amount * current offer rate) 3. Convert to home currency. The spot MTM P/L shown at the bottom of the Blotter module is the total sum of spot MTM P/L for all of your positions Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Blotter Data The various blotters provide tools that enable you to better analyze the data they capture. Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104 Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104 Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page Searching Blotter Contents To search the contents of a blotter, enter your search criteria in the Find: field. The table updates dynamically as you enter your criteria. You can search all blotters except the Outstanding Trades blotter. See Rebooking Outstanding Trades on page 68. Your search entry is case insensitive. Entering sell in the field results in finding all items that contain sell, Sell, and SELL. The search is also a partial word search, meaning that all values in all columns that contain your search entry are matched. For example, entering F1234 results in a match for CF12345 and RXF The reports that you print or download from the Blotter module include either the results of your search or a standard set of columns. See Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter on page 144 for more information about determining the contents of reports. Click Clear to clear your criteria and restore all items to the table. NOTE: NOTE: Clearing your search criteria does not affect any column filters you may have set. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 for more information. If the Find: field is not visible, click the More button ( ) to show a menu with the field Filtering Blotter Contents by Column You can filter the contents of the blotters by values in the table columns. Columns that you can filter have a dark, downward pointing arrow in their column heading. You can filter the various blotters by the following information:

104 3.14 Sorting, Searching, and Filtering Blotter Data 104 Orders Blotter: Trader Order type Buy or sell Currency pair Dealt currency Time in force Order status Counterparty Positions blotter: Currency pair Buy or sell Done Trades blotter: Currency pair Trade type Trader Counterparty Messages Blotter: Trading event Trader Exceptions Blotter: Trading event Trader The reports that you print or download from the Blotter module include either the results of your filtering or a standard set of columns. See Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter on page 144 for more information about determining the contents of reports. To filter a blotter by column: 1. Click the dark arrow in the column heading. A drop-down menu appears with the items in the column. If the table is already being filtered by a value, the item is highlighted in the menu. 2. Click an item in the drop-down menu. The table updates to display only those rows that contain the value you selected. To clear the filtering of a column, select All from the menu. To clear the filtering of all columns, click the Column Filters Off button ( ) next to the Find: field. The Column Filters Off button only appears when one or more columns are filtered. NOTE: Clearing column filters does not affect any search criteria you have set. See Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 for more information Sorting Blotter Contents To sort the contents of a blotter by column, click on any column header to toggle between ascending and descending order. An arrow appears next to the column heading to indicate how the column is sorted. To sort by more than one column, hold down the Shift key and click on multiple column headers. To remove the multi-column sorting, click on any column header without pressing the Shift key Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter To change the date range of the items displayed, select a time period from the Period drop-down list in the various blotters. For an explanation of the unique choices and functionality of the Period drop-down list in the Positions blotter, see Viewing Positions in the Blotter on page 79. If the Period drop-down list is not visible, click the More button ( drop-down list. ) to show a menu with the

105 3.15 Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events Depending on your user permissions, the Blotter module allows you to see the trades and trading events for all trader users in your organization. To display your organization s trades, events, and notifications, select Organization from the View drop-down list. To display only your own trades and events, select Trader from the View drop-down list. If you do not have the required permissions, the View drop-down list is grayed out and inactive. ) to show a menu with the drop- If the View drop-down list is not visible, click the More button ( down list Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to download the contents of the various blotters to a CSV file. Your download includes only the data as displayed in the blotter, subject to the columns you have configured in the Blotter module and by any active filters or searches. See Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter on page 144, Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103, and Searching Blotter Contents on page 103 for more information. To download blotter items to a CSV file: 1. Select the items from the table in the blotter using Ctrl+click and Shift+click. To download all items in the table, make sure that no items are selected. 2. Click the Download button ( ). If the button is not visible, click the More button ( ) to show a menu with the Download button. The Save File dialog appears. 3. Select a directory from the dialog. 4. Enter the file name in the File name: field. 5. Click Save. Renesource Capital FX Professional saves the file to the directory you selected and opens a dialog asking you if you want to open the downloaded file. 6. If you want to open the file, click Yes and Renesource Capital FX Professional opens the file using the application configured to access CSV files, usually Microsoft Excel. Otherwise, click No to close the dialog and continue working in Renesource Capital FX Professional.

106 CHAPTER 4 Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional 4.1 Introduction The Settings window (Tools > Settings) allows you to configure how Renesource Capital FX Professional displays data, takes prices, and connects to the FX Grid. Renesource Capital FX Professional also allows you to manage the trading details for each currency pair. These settings are local to your computer: Default Settings on page 107: customizing and applying the default values for settings General Settings on page 108: display preferences and overall behavior of trading modules Trading Settings on page 114: how prices are displayed and orders are matched RFS Settings on page 126: trading attributes of RFS currency pairs Advanced Orders Settings on page 129: how orders are entered, displayed, and filled Quick Orders Settings on page 131: showing and configuring the Quick Orders buttons Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) on page 134: managing your price subscriptions by liquidity provider and currency pair Blotter Settings on page 142: how to track trades and messages, cover trades, and configure columns in the blotters and reports Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Network Connectivity on page 147: connections to quote and order hosts, and proxy settings Configuring Trading Notifications on page 149: popup and sound notifications for verified, rejected, and delayed trades 4.2 Configuring Trading Preferences for a Currency Pair The settings windows allow you to set the following trading preferences for a single currency pair or to set the default preferences for currency pairs: Liquidity Providers and Price Subscriptions o Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Liquidity Provider on page 137 o Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Currency Pair on page 134

107 4.3 Default Settings 107 o Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page 138 Prices o Setting the Number of Prices in the Full Book and RFS Full Book Modules on page 120 o Filtering Price Sizes from the FX Board and Full Book Modules on page 120 o Showing Your Own Orders as Intrafloor Prices on page 140 Default Sizes o Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page 121 Tenors/RFS o Setting Default Tenors for Outright and Swap RFS on page 126 o Setting Default Tenors for Rolling Positions on page 126 Order Entry o Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size on page 123 o Setting the Default Size for the Orders Module on page 121 o Setting the Default Display Size for Orders on page 122 o Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 o Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124 o Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market on page Default Settings Many settings windows allow you to restore the original settings when Renesource Capital FX Professional was installed by clicking the Restore Defaults button. General Defaults on page 107 Trading Defaults on page 108 RFS Defaults on page 108 Advanced Orders Defaults on page 108 Blotter Defaults on page 108 Notifications Defaults on page General Defaults To restore the default settings in the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General), click the Restore Defaults button and then click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window and preserve your previous settings.

108 4.4 General Settings Trading Defaults To restore the default settings in the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading), click the Restore Defaults button and then click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window and preserve your previous settings RFS Defaults To restore the default value of the Expiry Time field in the RFS settings window (Tools > Settings > RFS), click the Restore Defaults button and then click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window and preserve your previous settings Advanced Orders Defaults To restore the default settings in the Advanced Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Advanced Orders), click the Restore Defaults button and then click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window and preserve your previous settings Blotter Defaults To restore the default settings in the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter), click the Restore Defaults button and then click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window and preserve your previous settings Notifications Defaults To restore the default settings in the Notifications settings window (Tools > Settings > Notifications), click the Restore Defaults button and then click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window and preserve your previous settings. 4.4 General Settings With the General settings window you determine the overall behavior of trading modules and how information is displayed and printed: Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) on page 109 Configuring Screen Locking on page 109 Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110 Reverting to Default Sizes on Price Taking or Order Entry on page 110 Enabling Automatic Unit Shortcuts on page 111

109 4.4 General Settings 109 Showing Price Movement Indicators on page 111 Show the Spread at the Top of the Book in the Trading Modules on page 112 Show Prices with Zero Size on page 112 Show the Value Date of Prices on page 112 Including Execution Range in Prices Display on page 112 Automatically Printing Trade Tickets on page 113 Being Notified of Active Orders When You Exit on page Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display To set the date, time, and amount format for the trading screen, reports, and downloads: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. In the Display section, set the following: o From the Date Format drop-down list, choose a date format. The default format is dd/mm/yyyy. This is the format that you use to enter value dates in the RFS modules. See The RFS Module on page 202 and The RFS Full Book Module on page 206. o From the Time Format drop-down list, choose a time format. The default format is HH:mm:ss. o From the Amount Format/Neg. Indicator drop-down list, choose a negative indicator. The default format is - leading. o From the Amount Format/Thousands and Decimal Indicator drop-down list, choose a thousands and decimal indicator. The default format is North American: e.g. 1,000, Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Setting the Spot MTM P/L Currency (Home Currency) Renesource Capital FX Professional calculates and displays your spot mark-to-market profit and loss (spot MTM P/L) in the Positions blotter. See Spot Mark-to-Market Profit/Loss Display on page 102. You can choose the currency in which the amount is displayed (the home currency). To set the home currency in which spot MTM P/L amounts are displayed: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. In the Display section, select a currency from the Spot MTM P/L Currency drop-down list. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. The spot MTM P/L amounts in the Position blotter change to reflect the new display currency Configuring Screen Locking You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to lock the trading screen after a period of inactivity. If you log-in with a static password, you can also require that you enter your Renesource Capital FX Professional password to unlock the trading screen.

110 4.4 General Settings 110 To configure the time and password for the trading screen lock: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. In the Display section, check the Lock Trading Modules checkbox to lock the trading screen after a period of inactivity. Enter a number of minutes of this period in the field. The minimum time is 1 minute. The maximum time is 480 minutes. The idle time is counted by any mouse or key activity in the trading screen, not just by trading activity. 3. If you have a static password (a password that is valid for more than one log-in session), check the Password Protect Locked Trading Modules checkbox to require your Renesource Capital FX Professional user password to unlock the trading screen that has been locked either because of inactivity or by clicking the Lock Modules button in the toolbar. This setting is not available to users who log in with only a one-time password. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency If you have the correct permissions, the dealt currency toggle buttons in the various trading modules allow you to choose to trade the base or term currency of a currency pair. With the correct permissions, you can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to show or hide the buttons. The buttons change color to indicate that you are trading the term currency: The dealt amount in the amount field is converted to the term currency. The term currency is used to determine the price tier for price display and order matching. Renesource Capital FX Professional converts your maximum order size when trading the term currency. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122. NOTE: Trading the term currency only applies to currencies. If you trade metals, the dealt currency toggle buttons are hidden even if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional to show the buttons. To show or hide the dealt currency toggle buttons: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Allow Term Currency Trading checkbox to show the buttons. This is the default setting. This checkbox is grayed out and inactive if you do not have permission to trade the term currency. o Uncheck the Allow Term Currency Trading checkbox to hide the buttons. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Reverting to Default Sizes on Price Taking or Order Entry Normally, the sizes in the trading modules show the default sizes that you have defined, as described in Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page 121 and Setting the Default Size for the Orders Module on page 121.

111 4.4 General Settings 111 If you override the default by entering an amount in a size field and then take the price, you can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to either keep the new size or to restore the default size. To set the behavior of price sizes in the trading modules: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check Revert to Default Size to restore the default size after taking a price. By default, this setting is checked. o Uncheck Revert to Default Size to retain the override amount. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Enabling Automatic Unit Shortcuts You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to make certain assumptions about entries of three or less whole numbers to protect you from entering inadvertently large amounts. If you routinely trade in absolute amounts, you should consider disabling this feature. See Assuming the Unit Shortcut for Currencies on page 58 for more information about how Renesource Capital FX Professional automatically applies unit shortcuts. To enable or disable automatic unit shortcuts to entered amounts: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Disable Automatic Unit Shortcuts checkbox to prevent Renesource Capital FX Professional from appending a unit shortcut to your amount entries. o Uncheck the checkbox to allow Renesource Capital FX Professional to add unit shortcuts to your amount entries automatically. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Showing Price Movement Indicators You can configure the trading modules to show an arrow that indicates the direction of a price s movement. For more information about the arrows, see Price Movement Indicators on page 228. To show or hide the price movement arrows: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Show Price Movement Indicators checkbox to show the arrows. o Uncheck the checkbox to hide the arrows. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

112 4.4 General Settings Show the Spread at the Top of the Book in the Trading Modules You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to show the spread of the best prices in the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book). To show spreads: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Display Price Spreads checkbox to show spreads in the modules. o Uncheck the checkbox to hide spreads in the modules. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Show Prices with Zero Size At times, you may receive prices with zero size. You can choose either to show these prices in the trading modules or to show the currency pair and side as inactive. To show prices with zero size: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Display Zero Sizes checkbox to show unsupported prices the trading modules. o Uncheck the checkbox to show the currency pair and side as inactive when you receive prices with zero size. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Show the Value Date of Prices You can choose to display the value date of trades that you execute when you take prices from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book). The value date is determined by the quoting convention of the particular currency pair. To show value dates: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Show Value Date checkbox to show value dates in the trading modules. o Uncheck the checkbox to hide the value dates. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Including Execution Range in Prices Display You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to show prices in the FX Board module with the execution range that you have defined for the currency pair and size. This gives you an immediate indication of the limit rate submitted with the order when you take a price in the trading

113 4.4 General Settings 113 modules. This setting applies to prices display in the FX Board only. The rates in all other trading modules, blotters, and reports are not affected. See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124 for more information about execution ranges. To show prices in the FX Board module with execution ranges: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Include Execution Ranges in Prices Display checkbox to show prices in the FX Board that include the execution ranges. o Clear the checkbox to show prices without the execution ranges. This is the default setting. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Automatically Printing Trade Tickets You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to automatically print a ticket when a trade is executed and entered in the Done Trades blotter. To configure automatic ticket printing: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Auto-Print Trade Tickets checkbox to print a trade ticket whenever a trade is done. o Uncheck the checkbox to disable printing tickets automatically. This is the default setting. 3. If you choose to automatically print trade tickets, you can choose the print to use by doing one of the following: o Click the Use default printer option button to print trade tickets to the default printer configured for your workstation. o Click the Printer option button and then select a printer from the drop-down list. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Being Notified of Active Orders When You Exit You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to notify you of active orders when you log out or when you exit the application. If your connection to the FX Grid is configured to enable order persistence, then limit, stop, and market orders remain active and working until they are filled or they expire even if you log out, reconnect, exit. To be alerted about active orders when you exit: 1. Navigate to the General settings window (Tools > Settings > General). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Prompt me before exiting application when active orders exist checkbox to be notified. o Uncheck the checkbox to be able to exit without being notified.

114 4.5 Trading Settings Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. 4.5 Trading Settings You choose how prices are displayed and taken with the Trading settings window: Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking on page 118 Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size on page 123 Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules on page 119 Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules on page 119 Setting the Volatile Market Multiplier on page 119 Setting the Number of Prices in the Full Book and RFS Full Book Modules on page 120 Filtering Price Sizes from the FX Board and Full Book Modules on page 120 Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page 121 Setting the Default Size for the Orders Module on page 121 Setting the Default Display Size for Orders on page 122 Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 Execution Range by Currency Pair and Size o Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124 o Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market on page Execution Types Described Execution types determine how your orders are matched, either when you submit an order from the Orders module or when Renesource Capital FX Professional submits orders as a result of taking prices and covering positions. Table 4-1 Execution Types by Order Type Order Type Execution Type Limit Top of book: This is the default execution type for limit orders. Your order is matched with prices that match or better the limit price. If the market never hits the order price, then the order remains unfilled. VWAP/Sweep: Your order is matched with all prices in the book that achieve an average execution price better than or equal to the limit price. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115 for more details. Market range Top of book: Your order is matched with the top of book within the pips range until filled. VWAP/Sweep: This is the default execution type for market range orders. Your order is matched with all prices in the book according to VWAP rules within the pips range until filled. Sweep: Your order is matched with all prices in the book within the pips range until filled. Market Top of book: Your order is matched with the top of book until filled.

115 4.5 Trading Settings Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) The volume-weighted average price (VWAP) is the weighted average price for a given dealt amount based on the current market price from different liquidity providers in the depth of book. VWAP Execution For VWAP execution, Renesource Capital FX Professional matches the order with prices that achieve an average execution price better than or equal to the limit price. Renesource Capital FX Professional matches with a price worse than the limit price if and only if there is no better price available and the average execution price remains better than or equal to the limit price. In this way, you achieve immediacy of execution and an optimal execution price based on the all of the available prices. VWAP Price Display and Workflow For an explanation of VWAP price display and price-taking workflow in the FX Board module, see VWAP Price-Taking Examples on page 115. The FX Board module displays VWAP prices VWAP Price-Taking Examples For the examples in this section, assume that the Full Book module shows the following depth of book for EUR/USD with provider priority selected ( Setting Price Ranking Order in Case of a Tie on page 129) and set as Bank1, Bank2, Bank3, Bank4, and Bank5 in that order: Table 4-1 Depth of Book LP Bid Limit Total Amt Bid Price Offer Price Offer Limit Total Amt LP Bank Bank1 Bank Bank5 Bank Bank3 Bank Bank2 Bank Bank4 The following examples illustrate what the FX Board module displays and what happens when you take a VWAP price: Provider in the top of the book has the amount available on page 115 The depth of the book has the amount available on page 116 The dealt amount is more than what is available in the depth of the book on page 116 Example 4-1 Provider in the top of the book has the amount available If you enter a dealt amount of 7M, then the FX Board module shows for EUR/USD:

116 4.5 Trading Settings 116 Table 4-2 Top of Book Has Amount Available LP Total Amt Bid Price Offer Price Total Amt LP Bank Bank1 If you take the bid-side price, the 7M is matched with Bank3 at If you take the offer-side price, the 7M order is matched with Bank1 at Example 4-2 The depth of the book has the amount available If you enter a dealt amount of 30M, then the FX Board module shows: Table 4-3 Depth of Book Has Amount Available LP Total Amt Bid Price Offer Price Total Amt LP Bank = (1.4227*10)+(1.4220*10)+ (1.4220*10)/ = (1.4225*10)+(1.4226*20)/30 30 Bank5+ If you take the bid-side price: 10M is matched with Bank3 at M is matched with Bank1 at M is matched with Bank2 at If you take the offer-side price: 10M is matched with Bank1 at M is matched with Bank5 at Example 4-3 The dealt amount is more than what is available in the depth of the book If you enter a dealt amount of 100M, the FX Board module shows the price for the total amount in the depth of book: Table 4-4 Dealt Amount Is Greater than Depth of Book LP Total Amt Bid Price Bank = (1.4227*10)+(1.4220*10)+(1.4220*10)+ (1.4219*30)+(1.4218*20) / 80 Offer Price = (1.4225*10)+(1.4226*20)+(1.4231*10)+ (1.4232*10)+(1.4232*30) / 80 Total Amt LP 80 Bank4+ If you take the bid-side price: 10M is matched with Bank3 at M is matched with Bank1 at M is matched with Bank2 at M is matched with Bank4 at M is matched with Bank5 at The unfilled 20M is matched with new prices until your order expires. If you take the offer-side price:

117 4.5 Trading Settings M is matched with Bank1 at M is matched with Bank5 at M is matched with Bank3 at M is matched with Bank2 at M is matched with Bank4 at The unfilled 20M is matched with new prices until your order expires Aggregate Prices When multiple liquidity providers supply the same price, Renesource Capital FX Professional displays an aggregate price with the total size available at the price from all providers. You can configure the Full Book module to show aggregate prices. See Aggregating Prices in the Full Book Module on page 163. Renesource Capital FX Professional also shows aggregate prices in the FX Board module for VWAP prices. Renesource Capital FX Professional indicates an aggregate price with a plus sign (+) after the liquidity provider s name. Figure 4-1 Aggregate Price Multi-Tier Quotes A liquidity provider can stream multi-tier prices to Renesource Capital FX Professional. Each new price that you receive includes multiple tiers. Each tier represents the amount available at a particular price, giving you improved price discovery and greater flexibility. Renesource Capital FX Professional adds a numeric suffix to the liquidity provider s name to indicate the tier of the price. For example, if your provider BNKB streams quotes with three tiers, Renesource Capital FX Professional shows BNKB1, BNKB2, and BNKB3 in the book depending on which tier applies to the size that you are trading. Table 4-1 A Typical Multi-Tier Quote Tier Bid/Offer Pips Size of Price Tier 1 82/83 Tier 2 81/83 Tier 3 81/84 10M 30M 60M At any given time, Renesource Capital FX Professional displays only one tier in the FX Board module. Renesource Capital FX Professional changes the tiers dynamically as you enter an amount to trade in the FX Board module.

118 4.5 Trading Settings 118 When you enter a new amount, Renesource Capital FX Professional takes into account all of the available inventory in order to display the correct multi-tiered price and to fill your price-taking requests. The price at which you can trade is dependent on the size that you enter. The following examples illustrate this behavior: Example 4-1 Amount Met by Current Book Say that you are looking to buy EUR/USD 20M: 1. BNKA displays the best offer price of for 10M. 2. BNKB1 displays an offer price of for 10M. 3. You enter 20M. 4. The amount you are asking for can be met with the current inventory at the top of the book (10M from BNKA and 10M from BNKB1, both at ), so the book does not change. 5. When you select the BNKB1 price, you get the 10M from BNKA at and 10M from BNKB1 at Example 4-2 Amount Larger than Current Book Given the same book as in Example 1, say that you are now looking to buy EUR/USD 25M: 1. You enter 25M. The amount you are asking for exceeds the current inventory at the top of the book (10M from BANKA and 10M from BNKB1, both at ), so Renesource Capital FX Professional updates the book with a new tier from BNKB. 2. BNKA still displays the best offer price of for 10M. 3. BNKB now displays BNKB2, a tier 2 offer price of for 20M. 4. When you select the BNKB2 price at , you get the 10M from BNKA at and 15M from BNKB2 at While the tiered price always reflects the amount you have entered (25M in this instance), you always get the top of the book. Renesource Capital FX Professional does not give you the full amount at the worse price of Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking The take price buttons in the trading modules can be set to take a price with a single click or a double click. The setting applies to the Sell and Buy buttons in the RFS panel as well. Some traders may prefer the convenience of a single click while others may prefer the security of a double click. Regardless of the setting you choose, Renesource Capital FX Professional adds a one-second delay after a trade execution to protect you from accidentally executing multiple trades. To set the behavior of the take price buttons in the trading modules: 1. Navigate to the Price Taking settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Do one of the following: o Click the Single-Click Trading option button to be able to take prices with a single click. o Click the Double-Click Trading option button to require a double click for price taking. This is the default setting. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

119 4.5 Trading Settings Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules You can configure the default time in force for the orders that are submitted when you take prices from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book). To set the time in force for the trading modules: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose a time in force from the Time in Force drop-down list. For a definition of time-in-force methods, see Time in Force on page 184. o DAY o GTC (Good till Cancelled) o GTT (Good till Time) When you choose GTT the seconds field appears. Enter the number of seconds that orders are good for. Your entry must be one or greater. The minimum expiry time for GTT orders is one second. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Setting the Volatile Market Multiplier When Volatile Market trading is engaged, all of the execution ranges that you have defined are multiplied by a multiplier value that you set in the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). The default value of the multiplier is 2, meaning that execution ranges are doubled. To set the volatile market multiplier : 1. Navigate to the Price Taking settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Enter a value in the Volatile Market Multiplier field. The value you enter must be between 0 (zero) and 99. If you enter zero, then execution ranges are multiplied by zero, effectively removing ranges when Volatile Market trading is engaged. The default value is Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules You can configure the default execution type for the orders that are submitted when you take prices from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book). See Execution Types Described on page 114 for information about order execution. This setting applies to orders submitted with the Quick Orders buttons as well. However, because the Quick Orders buttons submit limit orders only, only the top-of-book and VWAP execution types apply. If you choose sweep execution, the Quick Orders buttons default to top-of-book execution. See Quick Order Buttons Described on page 165. To set the execution type for the trading modules: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose an execution type from drop-down list. For a definition of execution types, see Execution Types Described on page 114. o Top of Book (Quick Orders buttons submit limit top-of-book.)

120 4.5 Trading Settings 120 o VWAP/Sweep (Quick Orders buttons submit limit VWAP.) o Sweep (Not applicable to limit orders. Quick Orders buttons submit limit top-of-book.) 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. NOTE: When you trade from the Full Book module, sweep execution is used when you configure either the VWAP/Sweep or Sweep execution strategy. Renesource Capital FX Professional sweeps the market from the top of the book to the price that you clicked Setting the Number of Prices in the Full Book and RFS Full Book Modules To set the number of prices displayed in the Full Book and RFS Full Book modules: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair for which you want to define the depth of book from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. In the Rows to Display in Full Book field, enter the number of prices to display. The maximum value is Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window Filtering Price Sizes from the FX Board and Full Book Modules If you only want to see prices of a certain size or larger in the trading screen, you can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to filter prices from the FX Board and Full Book modules. To determine the minimum size to display: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair for which you want to filter price sizes from the currency pair dropdown menu. 3. In the Minimum Size Displayed field, enter the minimum size of prices to display. Prices with sizes less than the minimum are not displayed. To show all prices no matter how small, leave this field blank. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 4. Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window.

121 4.5 Trading Settings Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules For each currency pair, Renesource Capital FX Professional lets you define the sizes available from the drop-down lists in the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book, RFS, and RFS Full Book) for each currency. You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to restore these default sizes automatically. See Reverting to Default Sizes on Price Taking or Order Entry on page 110. To define the default amounts available in the trading modules: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair for which you want to define default amounts from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. In the Trade Sizes field, enter the sizes that you want to make available from the size dropdown list in the trading modules. You must separate multiple entries with semicolons. You can enter values with up to eight decimals. The leftmost size is displayed in the trading screen by default. Do not duplicate size entries. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. NOTE: The amounts you enter must be less than or equal to the maximum order size, if defined. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 for details. 4. Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window Setting the Default Size for the Orders Module You can set a default size in the Orders module for every currency pair in the system. The Orders module shows the default size when you first open the module or select a new currency pair. You can also configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to restore these default sizes automatically. See Reverting to Default Sizes on Price Taking or Order Entry on page 110. To set the default size in the Orders module: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair from which you want to set a default order size from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. Enter a new default size in the Default Size (Bid/Offer) field. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. NOTE: The amount you enter must be less than or equal to the maximum order size, if defined. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 for details. 4. Do one of the following:

122 4.5 Trading Settings 122 o o o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window Setting the Default Display Size for Orders Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to enter a size to show to other market participants who receive your displayed limit orders. A smaller display size allows you to enter a large limit order without revealing to other users the total size you are trading and potentially affecting the market. An order that discloses only a part of its total size is commonly called an iceberg order. You can define a default display size for each currency pair. NOTE: If you leave the default display size blank with no value, then the entire size of your order is revealed for all orders and price taking. This includes orders resulting from partial fills with the FX Board or Full Book modules, orders submitted to cover a position in the Positions blotter, and orders submitting with the Quick Order buttons. If you set the default display size to zero, then all orders and price taking requests are submitted as hidden orders. You can always override the default display size when you submit an order from the Orders module. To set the default display size for displayed orders: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair from which you want to set a default display size from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. In the Default Display Size field, enter a new display size. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. NOTE: If you leave the default display size blank with no value, then the entire size of your order is revealed for all orders and price taking. If you set the default display size to zero, then all orders and price taking requests are submitted as hidden orders. 4. Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to enter a maximum size for prices you take from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book) and orders submitted from the Orders module.

123 4.5 Trading Settings 123 The maximum size limits your potential exposure to inadvertently trading too large a size when taking prices or entering orders. When you trade the term currency, the maximum size is converted using the market mid rate. To set the maximum size that you can enter: 1. Navigate to the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair from which you want to set a maximum size from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. Enter a new maximum size in the Maximum Order Size field. Renesource Capital FX Professional warns you if you enter amounts larger than this value in any module other than RFS modules. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for information about valid amount entries. 4. Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window. In the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book), if you enter an amount that exceeds the maximum amount that you have defined, Renesource Capital FX Professional warns you by displaying an override button ( ) and disables the currency. You can still see market updates and order matching continues for any open orders in the disabled currency pair. To override your maximum amount and unlock the currency pair, click the override button. To unlock the currency pair without overriding the maximum amount, simply enter a value less than your maximum amount. The override button may appear and disappear as you enter an amount because Renesource Capital FX Professional makes certain assumptions about the size of your entry until you type a unit indicator. See Entering Amounts on page 57 for more details. In the Orders module, if you enter an amount that is larger than your maximum, Renesource Capital FX Professional displays a popup window that warns you when you submit the order. You must confirm the amount and override the maximum size to submit the order Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to send the following order types when you take prices in the trading modules: Market range Market Limit The order type that Renesource Capital FX Professional sends depends on the checkbox and the range value in the Execution Range table in the Trading settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading):

124 4.5 Trading Settings 124 Table 4-1 Order Types and Range Settings Order Type Checkbox Execution Range Limit Checked 0 (zero) Market Unchecked N/A Market range Checked Greater than zero See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124 for information about setting execution ranges by size and currency pair Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders With market range orders, Renesource Capital FX Professional matches the order against all prices with a range of pips from the top of the book. For each currency pair, you define a size and a range of pips that you are willing to accept to ensure immediate execution. The default execution range setting applies to the orders submitted when you take price from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book). If the range value is greater than zero, then you submit market orders with the defined execution range. If the range is set to zero, then you submit limit orders. You define separate pip ranges for market orders submitted when you click a FILL@MKT button. See Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market on page 125. The sizes you define are inclusive. For example, if you define execution ranges for 2M and 5M, the 2M range applies to orders greater than zero and equal to 2M. The 5M range applies to sizes greater than 2M and equal to 5M. Renesource Capital FX Professional automatically sorts the list by size. When you enter a market order from the Orders module, you can edit the default market range manually before you submit the order. Renesource Capital FX Professional submits orders automatically using the default market range when you cover positions in the Positions blotter. To set the default execution range for market orders: 1. Navigate to the Price Taking settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair that you want to edit from the currency pair drop-down menu.

125 4.5 Trading Settings In the Execution Range section, double-click the value of the size you want to change in the Range (Pips) column. To add a size, double click an empty row. To remove a size, delete the size and range values in a row. 4. To submit market orders, uncheck the checkbox. To send market range or limit orders, check the checkbox. 5. Enter the number of pips for the price range. The value you enter can be: o A maximum of 999 pips o A one-place decimal (for example, 0.8 ) o A positive number only o Zero (if zero, price taking results in a limit order) 6. Press Enter. The list automatically sorts by size. 7. Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market You define a range of pips for market orders submitted when you click the FILL@MKT button in the Orders module, the Orders blotter, or from an order notification popup window. See Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180. This range is separate from the default range that you set for market orders, allowing you to set a wider range for immediate execution of fill-at-market orders. For more information about the default execution range, see Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124. To set the fill-at-market execution range: 1. Navigate to the Price Taking settings window (Tools > Settings > Trading). 2. Choose the currency pair that you want to edit from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. In the Execution Range section, double-click the value of the size you want to change in the Fill at Mkt Range (Pips) column. To add a size, double click an empty row. To remove a size, delete the size and the range values in a row. 4. Enter the number of pips for the price range. The value you enter can be: o A maximum of 999 pips o A one-place decimal (for example, 0.8 ) o A positive number only 5. Press Enter. The list automatically sorts by size. 6. Do one of the following: o To save your changes to the single currency pair and close the window, click OK. o If you want to make changes to multiple currency pairs, click Apply to save your changes after each currency pair and then click OK to close the window. o If you want your changes to apply to all currency pairs, click the Copy to All Ccy Pairs button and then click OK to save your changes and close the window.

126 4.6 RFS Settings RFS Settings You configure the RFS attributes for each currency pair from the RFS settings window: Setting Default Tenors for Outright and Swap RFS on page 126 Setting Default Tenors for Rolling Positions on page 126 Setting the Default RFS Expiry Time on page 127 You configure the RFS liquidity providers from the RFS trading modules themselves. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page Setting Default Tenors for Outright and Swap RFS For each currency pair, Renesource Capital FX Professional lets you define the tenors that you can select from the drop-down list in the RFS and RFS Full Book modules. For a list of valid tenors that you can enter as a default, see Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59. The tenor drop-down lists are only active when you choose a trade type other than spot from the trade type drop-down list. The tenor drop-down lists display SPOT by default for all trade types. Your choice of default tenors determines the tenors in the list when you change the tenor. To define the default tenors available for a currency pair in the RFS and RFS Full Book modules: 1. Navigate to the RFS settings window (Tools > Settings > RFS). 2. Choose the currency pair for which you want to define tenors from the currency pair drop-down menu. 3. In the Default Tenor Outright field, enter the tenors that you want to make available from the tenor drop-down list when you choose outright ( OR ) from the trade type drop-down list. 4. In the Default Tenor Swap field, enter the tenors that you want to make available from the tenor drop-down list when you choose swap ( SW ) from the trade type drop-down list. You must separate multiple entries with semicolons. The leftmost tenor is displayed first in the drop-down list. Do not duplicate tenor entries. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about valid tenor entries. 5. Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair, Copy to All Ccy Pairs to apply your changes to all currency pairs, or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window Setting Default Tenors for Rolling Positions All views of the Positions blotter include Roll buttons that allow you to submit an RFS request to roll an open position. When you click the button, Renesource Capital FX Professional opens an RFS Full Book module with a near leg set to close the current open position and a far leg set to open another position. You can configure the default tenor for the far leg.

127 4.6 RFS Settings 127 To define the default tenors for rolling positions: 1. Navigate to the RFS settings window (Tools > Settings > RFS). 2. Choose the currency pair for which you want to define the tenor from the currency pair dropdown menu. 3. In the Default Position Roll Tenor field, enter the tenor that you want to use for the far leg when you roll a position. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59 for information about valid tenor entries. 4. Click Apply to save your changes to the single currency pair, Copy to All Ccy Pairs to apply your changes to all currency pairs, or OK to save changes to the single currency pair and close the window Setting the Default RFS Expiry Time You can set the number of seconds that you want an RFS price stream to remain tradable. Providers receive your expiry setting as part of your RFS request. The actual expiry time of the stream depends on the provider. To set the RFS expiry time that you request of a provider: 1. Navigate to the RFS settings window (Tools > Settings > RFS). 2. Enter the number of seconds in the Expiry Time field. The default value is 120. The maximum value is 999. The minimum value is Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Managing RFS Liquidity Providers For each currency pair, you can configure the liquidity providers that receive your RFS requests: Add/Remove RFS Liquidity Providers for a Currency Pair on page 128 Set RFS Provider Priority To Break Ties on page 128 You manage your RFS liquidity providers from the RFS module and RFS Full Book module. The default list of RFS providers includes all liquidity providers with which you have a trading relationship and who have elected to receive RFS requests from market participants. When you log in or when you open a new RFS Full Book module, the module is always configured for all providers. For the RFS module, FX Inside Professional saves your provider configuration for the currency pair as long as it is displayed in the RFS module. If you remove the currency pair from the module, the provider configuration reverts back to all default providers. You RFS provider configuration is independent of your configuration for ESP price streams as described in Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) on page 134.

128 4.6 RFS Settings 128 Add/Remove RFS Liquidity Providers for a Currency Pair To specify the liquidity providers that receive your RFS requests for a currency pair: 1. Open an RFS or RFS Full Book module if one is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS or File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS or Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Click the RFS button or the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Do one of the following: o For the RFS module, right-click the currency that you want to configure or click the view settings button for the currency pair ( ). o For the RFS Full Book module, either right-click the module or click the module settings button ( ). 3. Choose Configure Liquidity Providers... from the context menu. The Liquidity Providers window opens showing the providers currently configured for RFS in the currency pair. 4. To add providers, select them in the Available list and click the Add>> or Add All>> button. 5. To remove providers, select them in the Selected list and click the <<Remove or <<Remove All button. 6. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. Set RFS Provider Priority To Break Ties If two or more providers supply the same price for your RFS request, Renesource Capital FX Professional determines the top of the book and breaks the tie according to the provider priority that you configure. To set the RFS provider priority for a currency pair: 1. Open an RFS or RFS Full Book module if one is not already open: o Select File > New > RFS or File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS or Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. o Click the RFS button or the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). 2. Do one of the following: o For the RFS module, right-click the currency that you want to configure or click the view settings button for the currency pair ( ). o For the RFS Full Book module, either right-click the module or click the module settings button ( ). 3. Choose Configure Liquidity Providers... from the context menu. The Liquidity Providers window opens showing the providers currently configured for RFS in the currency pair. 4. Click a provider in the Selected list.

129 4.7 Advanced Orders Settings Click the up and down buttons to move the provider in the list. 6. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. 4.7 Advanced Orders Settings The most basic configuration of the Orders module is whether or not to show the order entry tools. You choose this configuration from the Orders module itself. See Hiding/Showing Order Entry on page 129. To configure the default values and behavior of the Orders module, you use the Advanced Orders settings window: Setting Price Ranking Order in Case of a Tie on page 129 Preventing Off-Market Order Entry on page 130 Canceling All Limit Orders on page 130 Clearing Inactive Orders Automatically on page 131 Activating the Orders Module When You Submit Orders in Other Modules on page Hiding/Showing Order Entry To conserve screen real estate, you can hide the order entry components of the Orders module, leaving just the list of active, filled, and cancelled orders. The Orders module includes a button in the button bar at the top of the module that toggles between (hide) and (show). To hide the order entry components, click the To restore the order entry components, click the button. button. If you click an active, unfilled order in the list while the order entry components are hidden, Renesource Capital FX Professional assumes that you want to amend the price or size of the order. See Amending Orders by Price and Size on page 177. If you click the AMEND button of an order the list, the Orders module expands. See Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace on page Docking the Orders Module You can dock the Orders module to the right side of the trading screen, locking the module in position and maximizing the length of the order list with your working orders. To dock the Orders module, right-click the module title bar and choose Dock from the context menu. To further increase the number of orders in the list, you can hide the order entry components by clicking the Hide Order Entry button. See Hiding/Showing Order Entry on page Setting Price Ranking Order in Case of a Tie In the case of a tie when one or more providers publish the same rates for a currency pair, you can choose how you want Renesource Capital FX Professional to rank the prices in and break the tie.

130 4.7 Advanced Orders Settings 130 This setting affects both price display and order execution. Renesource Capital FX Professional displays higher-ranked prices first in the trading modules and fills orders first with higher-ranked prices. To set price ranking in case of a tie: 1. Navigate to the Order Execution settings window (Tools > Settings > Advanced Orders). 2. In the Secondary Priority section, click one of the following option buttons to decide how Renesource Capital FX Professional determines the top of the book in a tie: o Size: The price with the largest size is considered the better price. o Time: The first price updated is considered the better price regardless of size or provider. Also known as Time Priority. This is the default setting. o Provider: The top of the book is determined by provider priority. See Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page 138 for details. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Preventing Off-Market Order Entry You can enforce a maximum spread for limit order entry. Traders cannot submit an order with an unfavorable spread (bid order less than offer market or offer order greater than the market bid) greater than the configured maximum. NOTE: This setting applies to limit orders only. To configure a maximum spread for limit order entry: 1. Navigate to the Order Entry settings window (Tools > Settings > Advanced Orders). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Prevent order submission when checkbox to enforce a maximum spread. o Uncheck the checkbox to allow any spread. 3. If you choose to use a maximum spread for limit orders, enter the maximum number of pips between the order price and current market price. You can enter a number from 1 to 99. Fractional pips values are not allowed. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Canceling All Limit Orders You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to cancel only limit orders and not stop orders when you cancel all active orders with the various OFF ALL and OFF ALL ORG buttons in the trading screen. This setting is inactivated by default. To choose which type of order you cancel with the OFF ALL and OFF ALL ORG buttons: 1. Navigate to the Order List settings window (Tools > Settings > Advanced Orders). 2. Do one of the following:

131 4.8 Quick Orders Settings 131 o Check the Off All Button Only Applies to Limit Orders checkbox to cancel only limit orders. o Uncheck the checkbox to cancel all active orders with the OFF ALL and OFF ALL ORG buttons. This is the default setting. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Clearing Inactive Orders Automatically You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to clear inactive orders from the Orders module after a number of seconds. To clear inactive orders from the Orders module automatically: 1. Navigate to the Order List settings window (Tools > Settings > Advanced Orders). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Automatically Clear Done Orders After checkbox and, in the adjacent field, enter the number of seconds that you want inactive orders to stay in the module. This is the default setting. o Uncheck the checkbox keep all filled and canceled orders in the Orders module. You must then clear the inactive orders manually. See Clearing Filled and Cancelled Orders on page Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Activating the Orders Module When You Submit Orders in Other Modules When you take a price from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book) or submit an order from the Blotter module, Renesource Capital FX Professional can bring the Orders module into focus so that you can monitor the status of the order. Otherwise, you can leave the Orders module closed or in the background to keep your trading uninterrupted. To configure a maximum spread for limit order entry: 1. Navigate to the Order Entry settings window (Tools > Settings > Advanced Orders). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Open/Show Orders Module on Order Submission checkbox to set application focus on the Orders module when you submit an order. If closed, the Orders module is opened. o Uncheck the checkbox to keep focus on the current module. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. 4.8 Quick Orders Settings You can configure the appearance and behavior of the Quick Order buttons using the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Quick Orders) and the Trading settings window (Tools >

132 4.8 Quick Orders Settings 132 Settings > Trading). The following aspects of the Quick Order buttons are customizable: Visibility: To hide or show the buttons, see Showing and Hiding the Quick Order Buttons on page 132. Button style: To choose how the buttons are displayed and how they function, see Choosing How the Quick Order Buttons Are Displayed on page 132. Execution: To choose how your Quick Orders are executed, see Setting the Execution Type for the Trading Modules on page 119. Time in force: To set the time in force of orders submitted with the Quick Order buttons, see Configuring Quick Order Time-in-Force on page 133. Offset increment: To set the increment by which prices are offset in the Quick Order buttons, see Configuring the Pips Increment of the Quick Order Buttons on page Showing and Hiding the Quick Order Buttons You can choose to show the Quick Orders buttons to access their functionality or to hide the buttons to streamline your trading interface. To show or hide the Quick Order buttons: 1. Navigate to the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Quick Orders). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Enable Quick Orders checkbox to show the buttons. o Uncheck the checkbox to hide the buttons. This is the default setting. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. If you choose to show the Quick Orders buttons, you can configure how they appear and how they function. See Quick Orders Settings on page Choosing How the Quick Order Buttons Are Displayed You can configure the Quick Order buttons to better compliment your trading workflow: Drop-down lists: The buttons open to show a list of pips or offsets. Clicking a pip value or an offset in the list submits the order. Buttons groups: Clicking a button submits a limit order with a price offset by the button s increment. As you resize the trading module, the groups expand to show increment buttons. In addition, you can choose how the buttons are labeled, either Bid on the left and Offer on the right or Sell on the left and Buy on the right. Clicking Bid/Sell submits a bid limit order. Clicking Offer/Buy submits an offer limit order. For details of the appearance and behavior of the Quick Order buttons, see Quick Order Buttons Described on page 165. To show the Quick Order buttons as drop-down lists: 1. Navigate to the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Orders > Quick Orders).

133 4.8 Quick Orders Settings Make sure that the Enable Quick Orders checkbox is checked so that the Quick Order buttons are shown in the trading modules. 3. Click the Display as Dropdown option button to show the Quick Order buttons as drop-down lists that allow you to pick an order price that is offset from the best price. 4. Click one of the following option buttons to determine how the offset prices are shown in the drop-down list: o Pips: The list shows pips values in increments from the top-of-the-book price by the increment amount. The pips you click are submitted as the order price. o Increment: The list shows increments, plus and minus. The increment you click is applied to the top-of-book price and is submitted as the order price. 5. Choose the button labels: o Check the Display as Buy/Sell checkbox to show the Quick Order buttons as Sell/Buy. o Uncheck the Display as Buy/Sell checkbox to show the Quick Order buttons as Bid/Offer. 6. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. To show the Quick Order buttons as button groups: 1. Navigate to the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Orders > Quick Orders). 2. Make sure that the Enable Quick Orders checkbox is checked so that the Quick Order buttons are shown in the trading modules. 3. Click the Display as Button option button to show the Quick Order buttons as expandable button groups. Note that the Pips and Increments option buttons are deactivated. 4. Choose the button labels: o Check the Display as Buy/Sell checkbox to show the Quick Order buttons as Sell/Buy. o Uncheck the Display as Buy/Sell checkbox to show the Quick Order buttons as Bid/Offer. 5. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Configuring Quick Order Time-in-Force You choose the time in force of the limit orders that you submit with the Quick Order buttons. This is independent of the setting for prices taken from the trading modules (see Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules on page 119). To configure the time in force of orders submitted from the Quick Order buttons: 1. Navigate to the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Quick Orders). 2. Choose a time in force from the drop-down list in the Order Type area: o GTC: Good till Cancelled, your order is good until filled or canceled. o GTT: Good till Time, your order is good until it expires. Enter the number of seconds that your order is good for in the field. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Configuring the Pips Increment of the Quick Order Buttons You configure the pips increment by which order prices are offset in the Quick Order buttons.

134 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) 134 The Quick Order buttons in the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book) allow you to quickly submit a limit order. To configure the pips increment for an individual currency pair: 1. Navigate to the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Quick Orders). 2. In the Pip Increment section, find the currency pair that you want to edit in the list. 3. Double-click the pip increment value. 4. Enter a new value. 5. Press Enter or click elsewhere in the list. 6. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. To configure the pips increment for all currency pairs: 1. Navigate to the Quick Orders settings window (Tools > Settings > Quick Orders). 2. In the field next to the Apply to All Ccy Pairs button, enter the new increment value or use the up and down arrows to adjust the value. 3. Click the Apply to All Ccy Pairs button. The list of currency pars updates with the new increment value. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) You can configure the price streams that you see in the trading screen by both currency pair and liquidity provider from the Liquidity Providers settings window: Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Currency Pair on page 134: Choose the providers you want to see for a currency pair. You also decide how to break ties. See Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page 138. Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Liquidity Provider on page 137: Choose the currency pair streams you want to see from a provider. If you have the correct permissions for intrafloor pricing and trading, you can also control whether or not other users in your organization see the orders that you have submitted as prices in their trading modules Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Currency Pair You can configure the liquidity providers who stream prices for a currency pair: Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 135 o Adding a Liquidity Provider from the Settings Window on page 135 o Adding a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules on page 135 Removing a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 136 o Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Settings Window on page 136 o Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules on page 137

135 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) 135 Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair You can add liquidity providers to a currency pair either directly in the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book, RFS, and RFS Full Book) or from the Settings window: Adding a Liquidity Provider from the Settings Window on page 135 Adding a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules on page 135 When you add a provider to a currency pair, you subscribe to the price stream from the provider in that currency pair. The providers that you can add must have a trading relationship with your organization. When a new trading relationship is established between your organization and a new liquidity provider, Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you the opportunity to add the new liquidity provider to currency pairs automatically. See Adding New Liquidity Providers to Currency Pairs Automatically on page 139 for more details. Adding a Liquidity Provider from the Settings Window When you add a provider to a currency pair, you subscribe to the price stream from the provider in that currency pair. The providers that you can add must have a trading relationship with your organization. To add a liquidity provider for a currency pair from the Settings window: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Providers by Currency Pair option button. 3. From the currency pair drop-down menu, choose the currency pair to which you want to add a new liquidity provider. 4. Select the liquidity providers you want to add from the Available list on the left. TIP: Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple liquidity providers. 5. Click the Add>> button. The selected providers move to the Selected list on the right. 6. Set the provider order with the up and down arrow buttons. For more information about provider ordering, see Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair, Copy to All Ccy Pairs to apply your changes to all currency pairs, or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window. Adding a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules When you add a provider to a currency pair, you subscribe to the price stream from the provider in that currency pair. The providers that you can add must have a trading relationship with your organization.

136 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) 136 To add a liquidity provider for a currency pair from the Full Book modules: 1. Right click anywhere in a trading module (FX Board, Full Book, RFS, RFS Full Book). You can also click the Module Settings button ( ) or the Currency Pair Settings button ( ). 2. Select Configure Liquidity Providers... The Liquidity Providers window appears. 3. From the currency pair drop-down menu, choose the currency pair to which you want to add a new liquidity provider. 4. To add all providers, click the Add All>> button. To add all default providers, click the Default Providers button. Otherwise, select the liquidity providers you want to add from the Available list on the left and click the Add> button. TIP: Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple liquidity providers. The selected providers move to the Selected list on the right. 5. Set the provider order with the up and down arrow buttons. For more information about provider ordering, see Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page Click OK to save changes and close the window. Removing a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair You can remove liquidity providers for a currency pair from either a trading module (FX Board, Full Book, RFS, RFS Full Book) or from the Settings window: Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Settings Window on page 136 Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules on page 137 When you remove a liquidity provider from a currency pair, the trading relationship between your organization and the provider remains intact, but you stop receiving rates in that currency pair from the provider. Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Settings Window When you remove a liquidity provider from a currency pair, the trading relationship between your organization and the provider remains intact, but you stop receiving rates in that currency pair from the provider. To remove a liquidity provider for a currency pair with the Settings window: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Providers by Currency Pair option button. 3. From the currency pair drop-down menu, choose the currency pair to which you want to remove a liquidity provider. 4. Select the liquidity providers you want to add from the Selected list on the left. TIP: Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple liquidity providers. 5. Click the <<Remove button. The selected providers move to the Available list on the left.

137 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair, Copy to All Ccy Pairs to apply your changes to all currency pairs, or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window. Removing a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules When you remove a liquidity provider from a currency pair, the trading relationship between your organization and the provider remains intact, but you stop receiving rates in that currency pair from the provider. To remove a liquidity provider for a currency pair with the trading modules: 1. Right click anywhere in a trading module (FX Board, Full Book, RFS, RFS Full Book). You can also click the Module Settings button ( ) or the Currency Pair Settings button ( ). 2. Select Configure Liquidity Providers. The Liquidity Providers window appears. 3. From the currency pair drop-down menu, choose the currency pair to which you want to remove a liquidity provider. 4. To remove all providers, click the <<Remove All button. Otherwise, select the liquidity providers you want to remove from the Selected list on the right and click the <Remove button. TIP: Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple liquidity providers. The selected providers move to the Available list on the left. 5. Click OK to save changes and close the window Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Liquidity Provider You can configure the currency pairs streamed by a provider and the order in which ties are broken. Also, Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you to opportunity to add new providers automatically. Adding a Currency Pair to a Liquidity Provider on page 137 Removing a Currency Pair from a Liquidity Provider on page 138 Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page 138 Adding New Liquidity Providers to Currency Pairs Automatically on page 139 Adding a Currency Pair to a Liquidity Provider When you add a currency pair to a provider, you subscribe to the price stream from the provider in that currency pair. To add a currency pair subscription to a provider: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Currency Pairs by Provider option button. 3. From the provider drop-down menu, choose the liquidity provider to which you want to add a new currency pair.

138 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) Select the currency pairs you want to add from the Available list on the left. TIP: Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple currency pairs. 5. Click the Add>> button. The selected currency pairs move to the Selected list on the right. 6. Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair, Copy to All Providers to apply your changes to all providers, or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window. Removing a Currency Pair from a Liquidity Provider When you remove a currency pair from a liquidity provider, the trading relationship between your organization and the provider remains intact, but you stop receiving rates in that currency pair from the provider. To remove a currency pair subscription from a provider: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Currency Pairs by Provider option button. 3. From the provider drop-down menu, choose the liquidity provider to which you want to remove a currency pair. 4. Select the currency pairs you want to add from the Selected list on the right. TIP: Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple currency pairs. 5. Click the <<Remove button. The selected currency pairs move to the Available list on the left. 6. Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair, Copy to All Providers to apply your changes to all providers, or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window. Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie When one or more providers publish the same rates for a currency pair and you have chosen to sort prices by provider, Renesource Capital FX Professional uses the order of providers in the Liquidity Providers settings window as a tiebreaker. NOTE: You must configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to use provider priority for this setting to apply. See Setting Price Ranking Order in Case of a Tie on page 129. For example, if BankA and BankB offer the same price and you place BankB above BankA in the list, then Renesource Capital FX Professional considers BankB s price the better price. To set the provider priority in case of a tie: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Providers by Currency Pair option button. 3. Choose the currency pair for which you want to set provider priority from the currency pair drop-down menu.

139 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) Select the liquidity provider you want to reorder in the Selected liquidity providers list on the right. 5. Click the up and down arrow buttons next to the list until the provider is positioned where you want it. NOTE: The list is ordered from highest priority at the top to lowest priority at the bottom. 6. Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair, Copy to All Ccy Pairs to apply your changes to all currency pairs, or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window. Adding New Liquidity Providers to Currency Pairs Automatically When you log in, Renesource Capital FX Professional checks if any new trading relationships have been established between your organization and new liquidity providers. If there are any new liquidity providers, Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you the opportunity to add the providers to currency pairs automatically. On your next log in after the trading relationship has been established, Renesource Capital FX Professional displays the following popup for each new provider: Figure 4-1 Liquidity Provider Configuration Pop-up To add all applicable currency pairs subscriptions to the new provider, click the Add All button. To add selected currency pairs to the new provider, follow these steps: 1. In the Liquidity Provider Configuration pop-up, click the Select button. 2. The Currency Pair Configuration Window opens for the provider.

140 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) 140 Figure 4-2 Currency Pair Configuration Window 3. Click the currency pairs that you want to add in the Available list on the left. Use Ctrl+click and Shift+click to select multiple currency pairs. 4. Click the Add> button to move the currency pairs to the Selected list on the right. You can also click the Add All>> button to move all currencies. 5. If you do not want to be prompted for currency pair subscriptions for this provider again, check the Do not prompt again for subscription to this Provider checkbox. NOTE: You can always edit currency pair subscriptions from the FX Board and Full Book modules or in the Liquidity Providers settings window (Settings > Liquidity Providers). See Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 135 and Removing a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 136 for more details. 6. When the Selected list contains all the currency pairs that you want to add for the provider, click OK Showing Your Own Orders as Intrafloor Prices When you submit an order, your order appears in the Full Book module as an indicative price to show your price relative to the market. If you have the correct permissions, you can also configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to show your own order as an executable intrafloor price in the FX Board and Full Book modules. You can apply this setting to individual currency pairs and to all currency pairs at once.

141 4.9 Liquidity Providers Settings (ESP Price Subscriptions) 141 Figure 4-1 Full Book Module with Own Order (#1) Also Shown as Executable Intrafloor Price (#2) To show your orders as intrafloor prices for specific currency pairs with the Settings window: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Providers by Currency Pair option button. 3. From the currency pair drop-down menu, choose the currency pair to which you want to modify. 4. Do one of the following: o Check the Show my orders as prices to display your orders as executable intrafloor prices in the FX Board and Full Book modules. o Uncheck the checkbox to show your orders only as indicative placeholders in the Full Book module. 5. Click Apply to save your changes for the currency pair or OK to save changes to the currency pair and close the window. To show your orders as intrafloor prices for all currency pairs with the Settings window: 1. Navigate to the Liquidity Providers settings window (Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers). 2. Click the Currency Pairs by Provider option button. 3. Do one of the following: o Check the Show my orders as prices to display your orders as executable intrafloor prices in the FX Board and Full Book modules. o Uncheck the checkbox to show your orders only as indicative placeholders in the Full Book module. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

142 4.10 Blotter Settings 142 To show your orders as intrafloor prices with the trading modules: 1. Right click anywhere in FX Board or Full Book module. You can also click the Module Settings button ( ) or the Currency Pair Settings button ( ). 2. Select Configure Liquidity Providers. The Liquidity Providers window appears. 3. From the currency pair drop-down menu, choose the currency pair to which you want to remove a liquidity provider. 4. Do one of the following: o Check the Show my orders as prices to display your orders as executable intrafloor prices in the FX Board and Full Book modules. o Uncheck the checkbox to show your orders only as indicative placeholders in the Full Book module. 5. Click OK to save changes and close the window Blotter Settings You determine the behavior of the tools in the Blotter module the Blotter settings window: Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142 Requiring Confirmation for Covering Positions on page 146 Choosing the Behavior of the Positions Blotter When the Trade Date Rolls on page 146 Choosing the Order Type for Covering Positions on page 147 Put Focus Automatically on New Outstanding Trades on page 147 You change the columns that are displayed in the Blotter modules from the module itself. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page Keeping Track of Trades and Messages Renesource Capital FX Professional can mark new trades and messages as read or unread so that you can more easily keep track of trading activity. If configured, Renesource Capital FX Professional maintains a counter in the Done Trades, Messages, and Exceptions tabs showing the number of new items in the tables. Items that you have not yet acknowledged are shown in bold font.

143 4.10 Blotter Settings 143 Figure 4-1 Blotter Module Showing New Trade and New Item Counters If you have unread items when you log off, Renesource Capital FX Professional displays a popup window informing you of the unread items. You can configure how Renesource Capital FX Professional keeps track of trades and messages: Configuring Trade and Message Tracking To keep a count of new trades, do one of the following: Right-click the Done Trades blotter and make sure that Auto Clear Unread Trades is unchecked. Make sure that the Auto Clear Unread Trades checkbox is unchecked in the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). To keep a count of new messages, do one of the following: Right-click the Messages blotter and make sure that Auto Clear Unread Messages is unchecked. Make sure that the Auto Clear Unread Messages checkbox is unchecked in the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). Marking Items as Read Manually To clear individual items manually, click the item in the table. You acknowledge some items, such as entries in the Done Trades blotter, when you click a button in the trade verification popup window. To clear all items in a table, right-click the Blotter module and select: Clear All Unread Trades (Done Trades blotter) Clear All Unread Messages (Messages blotter). Clear All Unread Exceptions (Exceptions blotter). The clear all selections are inactivated and the new item counters are cleared.

144 4.10 Blotter Settings 144 Marking Items as Read Automatically This is the default behavior of the Done Trades blotter and Messages blotter. You cannot automatically clear exceptions in the Exceptions blotter. You must clear them manually. To mark trades as read automatically as they are entered in the Done Trades blotter, do one of the following: Right-click the Done Trades blotter and make sure that Auto Clear Unread Trades is checked. Make sure that the Auto Clear Unread Trades checkbox is checked in the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). To mark messages as read automatically as they are entered in the Messages blotter, do one of the following: Right-click the Messages blotter and make sure that Auto Clear Unread Messages is checked. Make sure that the Auto Clear Unread Messages checkbox is checked in the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter) Configuring Blotter Columns You can customize your view of the blotters by adding or removing columns and changing the order in which the columns are displayed. NOTE: Changing the columns in the blotters can also change the columns included in the reports and downloads generated from the blotter. To determine which columns are included in reports and downloads, see Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter on page 144. Adding Blotter Columns on page 145 Removing Blotter Columns on page 145 Arranging Blotter Columns on page 145 Choosing the Columns in Reports and Downloads from the Blotter When you generate a report or download from the blotters, you can choose to include either a standard set of columns or the columns currently displayed in the blotter. To configure the columns in reports and downloads from the blotters: 1. Navigate to the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). 2. Do one of the following: o To include a standard set of columns, check the Standard Columns in Report/Download checkbox. o To include only the columns currently displayed in the blotters, uncheck the Standard Columns in Report/Download checkbox. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for more information. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

145 4.10 Blotter Settings 145 Adding Blotter Columns To add columns to the blotters: 1. Open the blotter from the menu (Modules > blotter title) or by clicking the Blotter button in the toolbar and then clicking the tab in the Blotter module. 2. Right-click the module. 3. Click Configure Columns in the context menu. The Configure Columns dialog opens. 4. Select the columns that you want to add in the Available list on the left. Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple columns. 5. Click the Add>> button. 6. Click OK. Removing Blotter Columns Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you several ways to remove columns from blotters. To remove columns from the blotters, do one of the following: Click and drag the column heading out of the blotter. Note that a black X appears over the column heading. When you release the mouse button, the column is removed from the blotter. Right-click the column heading and choose Remove Column from the context menu. Use the Configure Columns dialog: 1. Open the blotter from the menu (Modules > blotter title) or by clicking the Blotter button in the toolbar and then clicking the tab in the Blotter module. 2. Right-click the module. 3. Click Configure Columns from the context menu. The Configure Columns dialog opens. 4. Select the columns that you want to remove in the Selected list on the right. Use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple columns. 5. Click the <<Remove button. 6. Click OK. Arranging Blotter Columns Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you several ways to arrange columns in the Blotter module. To change the order in which columns are displayed in a blotter, do one of the following: Click and drag the column heading right or left in the module. Note that red arrows appear between headings indicating the new location of the moved column. When you release the mouse button, the column is moved. Use the Configure Columns dialog:

146 4.10 Blotter Settings Open the blotter from the menu (Modules > blotter title) or by clicking the Blotter button in the toolbar and then clicking the tab in the Blotter module. 2. Right-click the module. 3. Click Configure Columns in the context menu. The Configure Columns dialog opens. 4. Select the column that you want to move in the Selected list on the left. 5. Click the up and down arrow buttons to move the selected column up and down in the list. The order of the columns in the list from up to down corresponds to the order of the columns in the blotter from left to right. 6. Click OK Requiring Confirmation for Covering Positions You can cover positions with a single click of the Cover buttons in the Positions blotter. Although this feature is powerful and convenient, you can reduce the risk of inadvertent trading by requiring that Renesource Capital FX Professional confirms a cover request. To require confirmation before an order is submitted to cover a position: 1. Navigate to the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Display Confirmation Dialog for Cover Trades checkbox to require confirmation for each position cover request. o Uncheck the checkbox to submit orders to cover a position immediately without confirmation. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Choosing the Behavior of the Positions Blotter When the Trade Date Rolls The information in the Positions blotter can change drastically from one trade date to another as trades mature. If you are viewing positions for your current session in Renesource Capital FX Professional with the time period in the blotter set to Session - Time, confusion about calculating positions can arise from the current date, the current trade date, and your current positions session in Renesource Capital FX Professional. You can configure the Positions blotter to show the positions that you expect to see after the trade date rolls. To set the date-roll behavior of the Blotter module: 1. Navigate to the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). 2. Do one of the following: o Click the Create New Session option button to create a new session for the Positions blotter when the trade date rolls. This is the default setting.

147 4.11 Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Network Connectivity 147 o Click the Switch to Session-Today option button to change the session for the Positions blotter to the current date when the trade date rolls. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Choosing the Order Type for Covering Positions You can cover positions with a single click of the Cover buttons in the Positions blotter. Renesource Capital FX Professional submits your cover orders as market range orders with VWAP execution and GTT time in force. See Market Orders on page 188. NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions Put Focus Automatically on New Outstanding Trades An outstanding trade is a trade done on behalf of specific accounts (legal entity), allowing you to rebook the trade. NOTE: Your organization must be configured to allow trading on behalf of an account and to allow rebooking of outstanding trades. The list of legal entities that trigger outstanding trades is configured when your organization is provisioned. Contact Business Support to change the list of legal entities. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page 62 for more information about trading on behalf of an account. You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to automatically select a new outstanding trade in the blotter so that you can rebook the trade with a minimum of input. To focus on new outstanding trades automatically: 1. Navigate to the Blotter settings window (Tools > Settings > Blotter). 2. Do one of the following: o Check the Set Focus on the Row when an Outstanding Trade is Added checkbox to automatically select new outstanding trades. o Uncheck the checkbox to add outstanding trades to the Outstanding Trades blotter without changing focus. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Network Connectivity CAUTION: Do not change the network connectivity parameters for your Renesource Capital FX Professional installation without consulting your network administrator. Doing so may disrupt your connection to the FX Grid and leave you unable to trade.

148 4.11 Configuring Renesource Capital FX Professional Network Connectivity Trading Server Your Renesource Capital FX Professional application must connect to the FX Grid to receive prices, submit orders, and do trades. To change the server that hosts your trading activity: 1. Click Settings button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window. 2. Enter the server name or IP address in the Host field. Do not include the URL protocol in the name or IP (for example, ). 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Proxy Server Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you several options for connecting through a proxy server: To use the proxy server settings from your Microsoft Internet Explorer installation 1. Click Settings button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window. 2. In the Internet Explorer section, check the Use Internet Explorer settings checkbox. 3. If your proxy server requires authentication, follow the steps in To use a proxy server that requires authentication on page 149 below. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. To use automatic proxy server configuration 1. Click Settings button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window. 2. In the Internet Explorer section, uncheck the Use Internet Explorer settings checkbox. 3. In the Automatic Configuration section, check the Automatically detect settings checkbox if you want Renesource Capital FX Professional to automatically detect your proxy server s settings. 4. If your network administrator has provided you with a detection script, check the Use automatic configuration script checkbox and enter the URI of the script in the Address: field. 5. If your proxy server requires authentication, follow the steps in To use a proxy server that requires authentication on page 149 below. 6. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window. To configure a proxy server manually 1. Click Settings button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window. 2. In the Internet Explorer section, uncheck the Use Internet Explorer settings checkbox. 3. In the Proxy Server section, check the Use a proxy server for your LAN checkbox and enter the configuration information as provided by your network administrator. 4. If your proxy server requires authentication, follow the steps in To use a proxy server that requires authentication on page 149 below. 5. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

149 4.12 Configuring Trading Notifications 149 To use a proxy server that requires authentication 1. Click Settings button in the Renesource Capital FX Professional Login window. 2. In the Credentials section, enter the configuration information as provided by your network administrator. The components in this section activate when you have chosen to use a proxy server with automatic or manual configuration. 3. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Configuring Trading Notifications Notifications are messages that inform you about trading and market events. You can configure how Renesource Capital FX Professional uses popup windows and sounds to draw your attention to notifications. Trade Notifications on page 149 Order Notifications on page 150 Show Only Customer Trade Notifications on page Trade Notifications You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to notify you of important trade events. To configure notifications for verified trades: 1. Navigate to the Notifications settings window (Tools > Settings > Notifications). 2. Click the A trade is verified event in the list. 3. Check a checkbox to indicate when and how you want to see the notification. If you want a sound to play with the notification, click the Browse button and choose the sound file. Click the arrow button to play the sound. 4. Check the checkboxes of the price-taking methodologies for which you want to receive notifications: ESP: Receive notifications resulting trading activity in the FX Board, Full Book, and Orders modules. RFS: Receive notifications resulting from trading activity in the RFS and RFS Full Book modules. 5. If you have the correct permissions, click one of the following option buttons to receive just your notifications or notifications for your entire organization: Trader: Receive notifications resulting from just your actions. Organization: Receive notifications resulting from the actions of any trader in your organization. 6. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

150 4.12 Configuring Trading Notifications Order Notifications You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to notify you of order cancellation and expiration. Notifications only apply to ESP orders that you have submitted yourself. For expired orders, the notification popup gives you the option of filling the order at the current market price or to do nothing. To configure notifications for orders: 1. Navigate to the Notifications settings window (Tools > Settings > Notifications). 2. Click the order event for which you want to be notified in the list. You configure each event separately: o An order has expired o An order is cancelled 3. Check a checkbox to indicate when and how you want to see the notification. If you want a sound to play with the notification, click the Browse button and choose the sound file. Click the arrow button to play the sound. 4. Check the checkboxes of the price-taking methodologies for which you want to receive notifications: ESP: Receive notifications resulting trading activity in the FX Board, Full Book, and Orders modules. RFS: Receive notifications resulting from trading activity in the RFS and RFS Full Book modules. NOTE: The Trader and Organization option buttons do not apply to order notifications and are inactivated when you select an order event. 5. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window Show Only Customer Trade Notifications By default, Renesource Capital FX Professional notifies broker users of verifications and rejections for both the customer trade (between the broker customer and the broker) and the cover trade (between the broker and the liquidity provider). To optimize your workflow and minimize distractions, you can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to show notifications only for customer trades. To restrict notifications to customer trades only, you must: Be a broker user Have permission to view your organization s trades, messages, and notifications (see Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105) Be able to submit hidden orders only (see Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185) To show notifications only for customer trades: 1. Navigate to the Notifications settings window (Tools > Settings > Notifications). 2. Click the Organization option button in the Notify me for section.

151 4.12 Configuring Trading Notifications 151 The Customer trades only checkbox activates. 3. Check the Customer trades only checkbox. This checkbox is unchecked by default. 4. Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save changes and close the window.

152 CHAPTER 5 The Renesource Capital FX Professional User Interface 5.1 Introduction The Renesource Capital FX Professional trading screen consists of the following components. The components you see depend on your user permissions: The FX Board Module on page 154 The FX Board module shows the top of book VWAP ESP prices for the configured currency pairs. It provides an interface to take the top of the book across multiple currency pairs and liquidity providers. All trade execution from the FX Board module is submitted as market range VWAP GTT orders. The Full Book Module on page 160 The Full Book module shows the ESP depth of book for a specific currency pair. The Full Book and FX Board modules are linked. By default, the currency pair displayed in the Full Book module is the currency pair that you have selected in the FX Board module. You can open more than one Full Book module at a time. All trade execution from the Full Book module is submitted as limit top of book GTT orders. The Orders Module on page 168 The Orders module allows you to enter bid and offer orders that are either displayed to other market participants or hidden from the market and managed locally by Renesource Capital FX Professional. The Orders module also allows you to monitor and cancel active orders. The Orders module is linked to the FX Board and Full Book module. By default, the currency pair displayed in the Orders module is the currency pair that you have selected in the FX Board module or the Full Book module. The Advanced Orders Module on page 189 The Advanced Orders module allows you to submit linked orders. Linked orders consist of two or more component orders that are linked by a contingency into an order chain. If one component order of the linked order chain is matched, the other component orders are changed according to their contingency. You construct linked orders with the Advanced Orders module, adding component orders to the list in the module. When the component orders are ready, you submit them all at once and then administer the order chain and the individual linked orders in the Orders module. You can also submit individual, unlinked orders with the settings in the module. Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64 In the Blotter module, Renesource Capital FX Professional provides tools that allow you examine and manage your trading activity and your positions. The RFS Module on page 202

153 5.2 Essential Renesource Capital FX Professional Functionality 153 The RFS module lists the top of the book and expiry time for the RFS price streams that you have requested. You can submit a request for spot, outright, swap, and NDF streams depending on your permissions. The RFS module is replaced by the Sales Dealer module for sales dealer users. See The Sales Dealer Module on page 195. The Sales Dealer Module on page 195 The Sales Dealer module provides a single interface for both your RFS and ESP trading. It is similar in function to the RFS module and replaces the RFS module for sales dealer users. The RFS Full Book Module on page 206 The RFS Full Book module shows the full depth of book for RFS streams in a specific currency pair from all the liquidity providers who responded positively to your request. You can open more than one RFS Full Book module at a time. The Account Details Module on page 99 The Account Details module shows your credit and P/L status updated every 5 seconds. Toolbar on page 229 Below the trading screen menu, the toolbar provides quick access to trading modules and buttons to lock the trading screen, disable trading, engage volatile market trading, and to cancel all orders. For sales dealer users, the toolbar includes the Org drop-down lists that allows you to select the organization that you are trading on behalf. Status Bar on page 230 The status bar along the bottom of the trading screen provides you with system information, informational messages, and indicators of Renesource Capital FX Professional s connectivity status. 5.2 Essential Renesource Capital FX Professional Functionality At its most basic, the Renesource Capital FX Professional user interface shows prices and allows you to trade on those prices. Sophisticated functionality drives the interface, determining how to display the prices and how to fill your request to trade when you click a price or submit an order. The following topics explain the workings and configuration of Renesource Capital FX Professional functionality in detail: Making Trades o Trading on page 26 o Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking on page 118 o Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) on page 55 o Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185 o Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 Showing Prices o Price-Taking Methodologies (ESP and RFS) on page 55 o Multi-Tier Quotes on page 117

154 5.3 Trading Modules 154 o Aggregate Prices on page 117 o Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115 o Setting Provider Priority in Case of a Tie on page 138 o Setting the Number of Prices in the Full Book and RFS Full Book Modules on page 120 o Filtering Price Sizes from the FX Board and Full Book Modules on page 120 o Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 135 o Adding Currency Pairs to the FX Board Module on page 158 Analyzing Trading Activity o The Account Details Module on page 99 o Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64 o Generating Trade Reports on page Trading Modules Renesource Capital FX Professional organizes your trading activity into modules: Streaming Prices (ESP) o The FX Board Module on page 154 o The Full Book Module on page 160 o The Sales Dealer Module on page 195 (both ESP and RFS) The Orders Module on page 168 The Advanced Orders Module on page 189 RFS o The RFS Module on page 202 o The Sales Dealer Module on page 195 (replaces the RFS module for sales dealer users) o The RFS Full Book Module on page The FX Board Module The FX Board module lists the best bid and offer prices for the configured currency pairs, providing you an interface to take the top of the book for several currency pairs from multiple liquidity providers. See Taking Prices from the FX Board Module on page 27.

155 5.3 Trading Modules 155 Figure 5-1 FX Board Module Prices Display The FX Board module always shows the VWAP price. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. Link to Full Book, Orders, and RFS Modules The Full Book, Orders, and RFS modules are linked to the FX Board module. When you select a currency pair in the FX Board module: The Full Book module automatically displays the depth of book for the selected currency pair as long as only one Full Book module is open. The currency pair of the Orders module changes to the selected currency pair. The currency pair of the RFS and RFS Full Book modules changes to the selected currency pair as long as the RFS modules are not currently showing prices. Opening Full Book Modules You can open Full Book modules for currency pairs in the FX Board module by right-clicking the currency pair and selecting Full Book from the context menu. If you open multiple Full Book modules, the FX Board module is no longer linked. You can also detach the module from the trading screen. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 for details. FX Board Module Components For each currency pair in the FX Board module, a group of user interface components allow you to: Take prices ( Take Price Buttons in the FX Board Module on page 158) Enter or select an amount to trade (see item 2 below) Choose the dealt currency (see item 4 below) The components change in appearance to indicate application focus ( Application Focus on page 228) as you navigate through the user interface with your mouse or keyboard.

156 5.3 Trading Modules 156 Figure 5-1 FX Board Module Components

157 5.3 Trading Modules 157 Table 5-1 FX Board Module Components Item Description 1 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. Changing the currency pair here also changes the currency pair selected in the Full Book module ( The Full Book Module on page 160) and the Orders module ( The Orders Module on page 168). 3 Amount field: Shows the default amount and lets you to enter a new amount. Default amounts are shown with a white background. If you type an amount manually, the field background changes to yellow to notify you of the manual entry. You can enter values with up to eight decimals. See Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page The value date of the prices in the module. See Show the Value Date of Prices on page 112. The date is replaced with the Max Size Override button, if you enter an amount that is larger than the maximum size and the currency pair is disabled until you click the button. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122. When this button is displayed, it takes the place of the value date, if shown. See Show the Value Date of Prices on page Dealt currency toggle button: Click to choose to trade the base or term currency. The button changes color to indicate that you are dealing the term currency. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This button is hidden for gold and silver trading. The converted term currency amount is used to determine price tier display and order matching. The maximum order size is converted when trading the term currency. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page FX Board module button bar: Click the Tear Off button ( / ) to detach or attach the module. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227. Click the Module Settings button ( ) to access settings that apply to the entire module. 7 Currency Pair Settings button: Click to access settings specific to the currency pair. 8 The liquidity provider supplying the best bid price. If you receive anonymous streams, the stream provider name displays here. A number suffix is added to the provider name to indicate the tier of the price. See Multi-Tier Quotes on page 117. A plus sign (+) is added to indicate an aggregate price for VWAP prices. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. If the price is an intrafloor price, your organization s name is displayed in italic text. See Intrafloor Prices on page The size available at the VWAP bid price shown. 10 Big figure of the bid price 11 Bid pips quoted in fractional pips 12 The spread between the best bid and offer price. See Show the Spread at the Top of the Book in the Trading Modules on page 112 for more details. 13 Price movement indicator. See Price Movement Indicators on page 228 for more details. 14 The liquidity provider supplying the best offer price as the third tier of a multi-tiered quote. See Multi-Tier Quotes on page 117. If you receive anonymous streams, the stream provider name displays here. A plus sign (+) is added to indicate an aggregate price for VWAP prices. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. If the price is an intrafloor price, your organization s name is displayed in italic text. See Intrafloor Prices on page Quick Order buttons: Available only if you have the correct permission. They allow you to quickly submit a limit order. See Quick Order Buttons Described on page 165.

158 5.3 Trading Modules 158 Take Price Buttons in the FX Board Module The take price buttons, shown below in red for emphasis, let you take prices for the selected currency pair. Depending on how you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional, a singleclick or double-click on these buttons takes the price for the amount shown. See Choosing Single- Click or Double-Click Price Taking on page 118. Figure 5-1 Currency Pair Take Price Buttons Adding Currency Pairs to the FX Board Module You can add currency pairs to the FX Board module using the mouse or shortcut keys. NOTE: You can only add the currency pairs that you have configured for the liquidity provider using the Settings window Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers. See Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 135 for details. To add currency pairs using the mouse: 1. Right-click the title bar of the FX Board module or click the Module Settings button ( ). 2. Select Add Currency Pair... from the context menu. The Add Currency Pair window appears. 3. Select the currency pairs you want to add. Use Ctrl+click and Shift+click to select multiple currency pairs. 4. Click Add. To add currency pairs using the keyboard: 1. With the FX Board module in focus, press Ctrl+Insert. The Add Currency Pair window appears. 2. Select the currency pair you want to add. 3. Press Enter. Removing Currency Pairs from the FX Board Module You can remove currency pairs from the FX Board module using the mouse or shortcut keys. NOTE: Removing a currency pair from the FX Board module only removes it from the trading

159 5.3 Trading Modules 159 screen. The liquidity providers you have configured using the Tools > Settings > Liquidity Providers menu are not affected. See Adding a Liquidity Provider for a Currency Pair on page 135 for details. To remove a currency pair using the mouse: 1. Right-click the currency pair you want to remove or click the Currency Pair Settings button ( ). 2. Select Remove currency pair from the context menu. To remove multiple currency pairs using the mouse: 1. Right-click the title bar of the FX Board module or click the Module Settings button ( ). 2. Select Remove Currency Pair... from the context menu. The Remove Currency Pair window appears. 3. Select the currency pairs you want to remove. Use Ctrl+click and Shift+click to select multiple currency pairs. 4. Click Remove. To remove a currency pair using the keyboard: 1. With the FX Board module in focus, use the arrow keys to select the currency pair you want to remove. 2. Press Ctrl+Delete. Resizing the FX Board Module You can resize the FX Board module to customize your view of the Renesource Capital FX Professional trading screen. By default, when you resize the FX Board module, the price buttons scale to fit the new module dimensions. If you want the currency pair groups to automatically arrange themselves in the resized module instead of scaling, right-click the title bar of the FX Board module or click the Module Option button ( ) and make sure than Auto Arrange is checked in the context menu. If Quick Orders buttons are configured to display as button groups, the groups expand with increment buttons as you resize the module horizontally. See Quick Order Buttons as Button Groups on page 167.

160 5.3 Trading Modules 160 Figure 5-1 FX Board Module Resized with Currency Pair Buttons Scaled To Fit The Full Book Module The Full Book module shows the best bid and offer prices for the requested size and the depth of book for a specific currency pair. Figure 5-1 Full Book Module You use the Full Book module to monitor the market for a currency pair and to take prices. See Taking Prices from the Full Book Module on page 28. Link to FX Board Module The Full Book and FX Board modules are linked. As long as there is only one Full Book module open, it automatically displays the depth of book for the currency pair selected in the FX Board module. Opening Multiple Full Book Modules You can open multiple Full Book modules to monitor the market for multiple currency pairs simultaneously. If you open more than one Full Book module, the FX Board module is no longer

161 5.3 Trading Modules 161 linked. You can open multiple Full Book modules in the following ways: Right-click the currency pair in the FX Board module or click the Currency Pair Settings button ( ) and select Full Book from the context menu for each currency pair. Select File > New > Full Book > currency pair from the main menu for each currency pair. Click the Full Book button in the toolbar. Full Book Module Components The Full Book module contains components that allow you to: Take prices ( Take Price Buttons in the Full Book Module on page 163) Enter or select an amount to trade (see item 2 below) Choose the dealt currency (see item 4 below) The components change in appearance to indicate application focus ( Application Focus on page 228) as you navigate through the user interface with your mouse or keyboard. Figure 5-1 Full Book Module Components

162 5.3 Trading Modules 162 Table 5-1 Full Book Components Item Description 1 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. Changing the currency pair here also changes the currency pair selected in the FX Board module ( The FX Board Module on page 154) and the Order module ( The Orders Module on page 168). 3 Amount field: Shows the default amount and lets you to enter a new amount or choose another from a list, if configured. If you type an amount manually, the field background changes to yellow to notify you of the manual entry. See Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page Max size override button: If you enter an amount that is larger than the maximum size, size, the currency pair is disabled until you click this button. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page The value date of the prices in the module. See Show the Value Date of Prices on page Dealt currency toggle button: Click to choose to trade the base or term currency. The button changes color to indicate that you are dealing the term currency. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This button is hidden for gold and silver trading. The converted term currency amount is used to determine price tier display and order matching. The maximum order size is converted when trading the term currency. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page Button bar with Tear Off button ( ) and Module Settings button ( ). See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227. Click the Module Settings button to configure liquidity providers and show aggregate prices. See Adding a Liquidity Provider with the Trading Modules on page 135 and Aggregating Prices in the Full Book Module on page The liquidity provider supplying the best bid price. If you receive anonymous streams, the stream provider name displays here. If the price is an intrafloor price, your organization s name is displayed in italic text. See Intrafloor Prices on page Price movement indicator. See Price Movement Indicators on page 228 for more details. 10 The spread between the prices at the top of the book. See Show the Spread at the Top of the Book in the Trading Modules on page The pips of the best offer price, shown with partial pips 12 Big figure of the best offer price 13 The size of the price (grey) and the total size available (black). The alternating colors in the depth of book (dark green/light green, light blue/dark blue) are used to indicate groupings of similar prices. 14 An aggregated price. See Aggregate Prices on page 117. The alternating colors in the depth of book (dark green/light green, light blue/dark blue) are used to indicate groupings of similar prices. 15 A displayed order submitted by you showing your organization short name in brackets and red text, in this example IPMA. For hidden orders, your organization s short name is shown in red text. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185 for more details. If the price is an intrafloor price, your organization s name is displayed in italic text. See Intrafloor Prices on page Quick Order buttons: Available only if you have the correct permission. They allow you to quickly submit a limit order. See Quick Order Buttons Described on page 165.

163 5.3 Trading Modules 163 Take Price Buttons in the Full Book Module The take-price buttons are shown in red below for clarity. Bid prices are on the left. Offer prices are on the right. Depending on how you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional, you can take the price you want by clicking any of the prices in the red-shaded area. See Choosing Single-Click or Double- Click Price Taking on page 118 for more details. The price on the lower right is your own order in the depth of book and thus is not an executable price. See Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42. Figure 5-1 Currency Pair Take Price Buttons Aggregating Prices in the Full Book Module To simplify your view of the depth of book, you can aggregate the prices displayed in the Full Book module. See Aggregate Prices on page 117 for more information about aggregate prices. To switch between aggregate prices and individual prices, right-click anywhere in the module or click the Module Settings button ( ) and click Aggregated View in the context menu. Figure 5-1 Full Book Module with Prices Not Aggregated

164 5.3 Trading Modules 164 Figure 5-2 Full Book Module with Aggregated Prices Resizing the Full Book Module You can resize the Full Book module to customize your view of the Renesource Capital FX Professional trading screen. When you resize the Full Book module, the top of the book and depth of book both scale to fit the new module dimensions. If Quick Orders buttons are configured to display as button groups, the groups expand with increment buttons as you resize the module horizontally. See Quick Order Buttons as Button Groups on page 167. Figure 5-1 Full Book Module Resized and Contents Scaled To Fit

165 5.3 Trading Modules Quick Order Buttons Described The Quick Order buttons allow you to quickly submit a limit order from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book) based on the top-of-book price. Figure 5-1 Quick Order Buttons The button on the left, either Bid or Sell, submits a bid limit order. The button on the right, either Offer or Buy, submits an offer limit order. The Quick Order buttons are highly customizable. You can choose to show them as drop-down lists or as expandable button groups: Quick Order Buttons as Drop-down Lists on page 165 Quick Order Buttons as Button Groups on page 167 You can further configure the following aspects of the buttons: Visibility: Hide or show the buttons in the trading modules Execution: How your Quick Orders are executed Time in force: The time in force of your Quick Orders Increment: The increment by which Quick Orders prices are offset from top-of-book price See Quick Orders Settings on page 131 for information about configuring the Quick Orders buttons. Quick Order Buttons as Drop-down Lists When you configure the Quick Order buttons to work as drop-down lists, clicking a button opens a drop-down list with either pips values or increments that you can click to submit a limit order. See Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page 45.

166 5.3 Trading Modules 166 Figure 5-1 Quick Order Buttons (Drop-down Lists) Figure 5-2 Quick Order Buttons (Drop-down List, Open with Pips) Figure 5-3 Quick Order Buttons (Drop-down List, Open with Offsets) The price under your mouse pointer is highlighted yellow to indicate the price of the order you submit.

167 5.3 Trading Modules 167 A red box indicates the current market price. The box moves as the market moves, so it is possible for the red box to move out of view if you keep the Quick Order button open long enough. On the bid side, prices two pips above the current market price are shown in red. On the offer side, prices two pips below are shown in red. To close the drop-down list without submitting an order, click anywhere in the trading screen or press Tab or Esc. Quick Order Buttons as Button Groups When you choose to show the Quick Order buttons as increment buttons, the buttons show as either a single Bid/Sell button and a single Offer/Buy button or as a group of increment buttons, depending on how you have resized the trading module. The buttons collapse and expand as you resize the module. Figure 5-1 Quick Order Buttons (Collapsed Buttons) Figure 5-2 Quick Order Buttons (Module Expanded to Show Increment Buttons) Figure 5-3 Quick Order Buttons (Module Further Expanded to Show More Increment Buttons)

168 5.3 Trading Modules 168 If you click the Bid/Sell button or the Offer/Buy button (either collapsed or when a part of the expanded group), you submit a bid limit order at the top-of-book price with no offset. When you click the increment buttons in the expanded group, you submit a limit order with a price offset from the top-of-book price by the button s increment. You can configure the increment of these buttons. See Configuring the Pips Increment of the Quick Order Buttons on page The Orders Module The Orders module allows you to enter orders that are either hidden from the market and filled only by incoming prices or are displayed to the market and filled both by incoming prices and by other market participants. For more details about the types of order you can submit, see Orders Overview on page 180. NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. Figure 5-1 Orders Module The Orders module is linked to the FX Board module and the Full Book module. The currency pair in the Orders module changes automatically to the currency pair that is selected in the other modules. Also, the bid/offer big figures in the Orders module update automatically to the big figures of the top of the book. Renesource Capital FX Professional validates the pips you enter to help prevent you from submitting an off-market order with mistyped pips. See Pips Validation on page 49 for more information. You can use the Orders module for the following: Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42 Amending Orders on page 174 Suspending and Resuming Orders on page 179 Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180

169 5.3 Trading Modules 169 Pips Validation on page 49 Canceling Orders on page 173 Clearing Filled and Cancelled Orders on page 173 Hiding/Showing Order Entry on page 129 You can submit linked orders from the Orders module list in the following ways: Click the TP/SL button of a filled order to submit a TP/SL order for the position. See Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94. Click the LINK button of an active order to link the order to a new order. See Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48 To submit linked orders, you use the Advanced Orders module. See Submitting Linked Orders on page 47. You can dock the Orders module to the right side of the trading screen, maximizing the list for your working orders. See Docking the Orders Module on page 129. You can also detach the module from the trading screen. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 for details. Orders Module Components The Orders module consists of the following components:

170 5.3 Trading Modules 170 Figure 5-1 Orders Module Components

171 5.3 Trading Modules 171 Table 5-1 Orders Module Components Item Description 1 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. Changing the currency pair here also changes the currency pair selected in the FX Board module ( The FX Board Module on page 154) and the Full Book module ( The Full Book Module on page 160). 2 Dealt currency toggle button: Choose to trade the base or term currency. The button changes color to indicate that you are dealing the term currency. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This button is hidden for metals trading. The maximum order size is converted when trading the term currency. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page Order type drop-down list: Choose a type of order to submit: Limit Orders on page 188 (LMT) Stop Orders on page 189 (STOP) Market Orders on page 188 (MKT) NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. The order entry tools available to you change depending on the order type you choose. For example, the Trigger drop-down list activates and the Show fields inactivate when you choose STOP from the list. This is the rate threshold at which trades are done against the order. Choose either the bid or offer rate as the stop trigger rate. See also Order Trigger Types on page 183, Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42, and Orders Overview on page Range checkbox and field: Only active when you choose MKT from the order type drop-down list. 5 Start Time checkbox: Check to activate the drop-down list and choose when the order begins matching: Start Now: Matching begins immediately after you submit the order. Start In: A field appears that allows you to set a relative time. Matching begins in the number of seconds/minutes/hours after you submit the order. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. Start At: Two fields appear for you to set an absolute time, one allowing you to enter a time of day and the other allowing you to choose a number of days after the current trading day. Matching begins at the date and time that you specify. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. 7 Big number for the bid with arrows to adjust the value. This number automatically updates from the streaming market prices. If you edit the big number, your edited value displays in yellow and does not update automatically. Click the Cancel button to clear your edited value and restore automatic updates. 8 Bid Show field: The display size of a displayed order. Use to submit iceberg orders and hidden orders. For displayed/iceberg orders, enter an amount that you want users to see. If you leave this field blank, the entire size of your order is revealed. For hidden orders, enter 0 (zero). Grayed out and inactive if you do not have a connection to an order host. See Setting the Default Display Size for Orders on page 122 for more information about display sizes and Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185 for information about displayed orders. 9 Trigger drop-down list: Only active when you choose STOP from the Type drop-down list. The rate threshold at which trades are done against the order. Choose either the bid or offer rate as the stop trigger rate. See Order Trigger Types on page Bid pips entry field with arrows to adjust the value. Click on the empty field and Renesource Capital FX Professional enters the pips of the current top of the book if available.

172 5.3 Trading Modules 172 Item Description 11 TIF checkbox: When this checkbox is checked and inactive, it indicates that the time in force in the dropdown list applies. TIF drop-down list: Choose the time in force to apply to a component order. TIF field: If you choose GTT, the field activates and you can enter an expiry time in seconds. See Time in Force on page Offer pips entry field with arrows to adjust the value. Click on the empty field and Renesource Capital FX Professional enters the pips of the current top of the book if available. 13 Offer size field: You can configure the default amount and the maximum order amount for the bid and offer fields. See Setting the Default Size for the Orders Module on page 121 and Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page 122 for details. You can also configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to restore the default size. See Reverting to Default Sizes on Price Taking or Order Entry on page Hide/Show Order Entry toggle button ( / ): Click to hide and show the order entry components of the module, leaving just the list of active, filled, and cancelled orders. See Hiding/Showing Order Entry on page 129. Module tear off button ( / ): Click to detach the module from the trading screen and to reattach. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227. Module settings button ( ): Click to access module settings, including docking the panel to the right size of the trading screen. See Docking the Orders Module on page Enter button: Click to submit the order. 16 SUSPEND ALL/RESUME ALL buttons: Click to suspend and resume all of your active orders. See Suspending and Resuming Orders on page Copy button: Click to copy the order. See Copying Orders on page Size and price fields on active, unfilled orders: Click to enter a new value and amend the order. See Amending Orders by Price and Size on page LINK button: Click to link an active order to new order. See Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48. Changes to the TP/SL button for filled and partially filled orders. SUSPEND/RESUME toggle button: Click to suspend matching of an active order and to resume matching. See Suspending and Resuming Orders on page 179. AMEND button: Click to amend an active or inactive partial order. See Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace on page 174. FILL@MKT button: Click to immediately fill the remaining open order amount at the market price. See Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page TP/SL button: Click to create a TP/SL order for the position opened by a filled or partially filled order. See Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page An active hidden offer stop order with an offer trigger rate. The background color of an order entry indicates its status: Active orders with no fills and delayed orders are white. Active partially filled orders are light green. Expired or cancelled partially filled orders are light yellow. Completed or cancelled unfilled orders are gray. 22 A partially filled displayed limit order (79M of 100M) with a display size of 5M. Matching has stopped with a remaining unfilled balance of which because the order expired. Note the background color indicating a partially filled expired order. 23 A partially filled displayed limit order (16M of 100M) that is still active and matching with a display size of 5M. Note the background color indicating a partially filled active order.

173 5.3 Trading Modules 173 Item Description 24 A filled displayed limit order with a display size of 5M. 25 Message bar, shows order number after you click the AMEND button to amend an order. See Amending Orders on page 174. Canceling Orders The Orders module allows you to cancel active hidden and displayed orders, which includes all unfilled and partially filled orders. You cannot cancel the filled portion of partially filled orders. You can configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to cancel only limit orders and leave stop orders active when you cancel all orders. See Canceling All Limit Orders on page 130 for more information. The user ID who cancelled the order is recorded in the Order Cancelled event in the Messages blotter. See The Messages Blotter on page 97. Canceling All Orders To cancel all active orders, do one of the following: Click the OFF ALL button in the Orders module. Click the OFF ALL button in the toolbar. Click the OFF ALL button in the Blotter module. Press F4. If the connection to the FX Grid is configured to allow it and you have the proper permission, you can also cancel all orders in your organization with the OFF ALL ORG button in the toolbar and in the Blotter module. If you click the OFF ALL ORG, Renesource Capital FX Professional opens a popup window asking you to confirm order cancellation for all active orders in your organization. Canceling Individual Orders To cancel individual orders, do one of the following: Click the OFF button of the order in the Orders module list. Click the OFF button in the Cancel column of the Orders blotter module. If you have the proper permissions, you can cancel individual orders placed by other traders in your organization. See The Orders Blotter on page 69 for more information. For linked orders, you can cancel all component orders of the linked order chain by clicking the OFF LINK button next to the linked order number of a component order in the Orders module list or the Orders blotter. See Cancelling Linked Orders on page 193. Clearing Filled and Cancelled Orders You can clear cancelled and filled orders from the Orders module to reclaim screen real estate.

174 5.3 Trading Modules 174 To clear all cancelled and filled orders leaving only active orders, click the Clear All button in the Orders module. To clear individual orders, click the Clear button of the order in the Orders module. You can also configure Renesource Capital FX Professional to clear orders automatically. See Clearing Inactive Orders Automatically on page 131 for more details. Amending Orders If you submit an order and then later need to change it, you can amend the order in the Orders module or the Orders blotter. If you are a chief dealer with the correct permissions, you can use your Orders blotter to amend orders submitted by other users. Renesource Capital FX Professional provides two mechanisms for changing orders: Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace on page 174 Amending Orders by Price and Size on page 177 Table 5-1 Order Cancel/Replace Compared to Order Amend Change Type Eligible Orders Cancel/Replace Active or suspended, unfilled or partially filled. Amend Price and Size Active or suspended, unfilled only Edits Allows All aspects of the order Price and size only Action Effect Click the AMEND button in the Orders list or blotter. Click the size or price in the Orders list. The original order is suspended while you edit the order is cancelled and a new order with a new order ID is submitted with your amendments. The original order is amended and the order ID is retained. Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace If you submit an order and then later need to change it, you can amend the order in the Orders module or the Orders blotter. If you are a chief dealer with the correct permissions, you can use your Orders blotter to amend orders submitted by other users. You cannot amend completed, filled orders. Active orders are suspended while you amend them. A suspended order is not crossed with incoming rates and other market participants cannot hit it. If you only need to change the price and size of an unfilled order, you should consider Amending Orders by Price and Size on page 177. For most linked orders, you amend the component orders separately. Amending one order in the order chain does not affect the other orders. However, TP/SL orders or order chains that consist of one limit order and one stop order with the same size and the OUO contingency type, if you amend one order in the chain, the other order is amended as well to the same amount.

175 5.3 Trading Modules 175 To amend an order: 1. Click the AMEND button for the order in the Orders module s order list or the Orders blotter. The Orders module changes in the following ways to indicate that you are amending an order: o The order list highlights the chosen order with a red border. o The order s status changes from Active to Suspended. o The module s title bar at the top and message bar at the bottom display the message Amending Order # with the number of the selected order. o The Cancel button changes to the Restore button. o The order entry section of the Orders module displays the details of the selected order. 2. Enter the new details of the order as described in Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42. Your order is suspended as you edit it. Renesource Capital FX Professional stops matching your order against incoming rates. Click Restore to restore your original order and resume matching. 3. Click Enter. Renesource Capital FX Professional cancels your previous order and submits a new order with the new details. If you click another order or another module before you click Enter, Renesource Capital FX Professional discards your changes and resumes matching. Figure 5-1 Orders Blotter with Order To Amend

176 5.3 Trading Modules 176 Figure 5-2 Orders Module with Order To Amend Figure 5-3 Orders Module with Order Selected for Amending

177 5.3 Trading Modules 177 Amending Orders by Price and Size If you submit an order and then later need to change it, you can amend the order in the Orders module or the Orders blotter. If you only need to change the price or size of an order, you can amend the order without having to cancel the original order. You can amend both the price and the size of an order at the same time. You cannot amend partially filled or filled order orders by price and size. If you need to amend a partially filled order or if you need to change any other aspect of the order beside price and size, you should consider amending the order by cancel/replace. See Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace on page 174. For most linked orders, you amend the component orders separately. Amending one order in the order chain does not affect the other orders. However, for TP/SL orders or order chains that consist of one limit order and one stop order with the same size and the OUO contingency type, if you amend one order in the chain, the other order is amended as well to the same amount. To amend an order: 1. Click the size or price of an active, unfilled order in the Orders module s order list. 2. Enter the new values. The field that you edit changes to yellow and the AMEND buttons changes to the ACCEPT button. 3. Click the ACCEPT button or press Enter. Renesource Capital FX Professional submits the changes and your order continues to match. If you click another order or another module before you click ACCEPT, Renesource Capital FX Professional keeps your changes unsubmitted in the list. If you close the Orders module, you lose your unsubmitted changes.

178 5.3 Trading Modules 178 Figure 5-1 Orders Module with Order To Amend Figure 5-2 Orders Module with Price Amended and Ready To Submit

179 5.3 Trading Modules 179 Suspending and Resuming Orders If you submit an order and then need to temporarily halt execution, you can suspend the order. A suspended order is not matched with incoming rates and other market participants cannot see it. You suspend and resume orders from the Orders module and the Orders blotter. If you have chief dealer permission, you can also suspend orders placed by other users in your organization in the Orders blotter. For most linked orders, you can suspend and resume individual component orders without affected the other orders in the order chain. However, for TP/SL orders, when you suspend or resume one component order, the other component order is suspended or resumed as well. See Linked Orders on page 187 and Take Profit/Stop Loss (TP/SL) Orders on page 187. You can filter the Orders blotter for suspended orders. See Show Orders by Status on page 71. Suspending and Resuming All Orders To suspend and resume all orders at once, use the Suspend All/Resume All buttons in the Orders module or the SUSPEND ALL/RESUME ALL buttons in the Blotter module. If you have chief dealer permission and you have selected Organization from the View drop-down list in the Blotter module, then the SUSPEND ALL/RESUME ALL buttons in the blotter suspend and resume all active orders for your organization. Suspending and Resuming a Specific Order To suspend a specific order: 1. Submit an order by doing one of the following: o Take a price from the trading modules (FX Board, Full Book). See Taking Prices from the FX Board Module on page 27 and Taking Prices from the Full Book Module on page 28. o Submit an order from the Orders panel. See Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42. o Submit an order with the Quick Orders buttons. See Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page Click the order s SUSPEND button in the Orders module s order list or the Orders blotter before the order is completely filled or expires. The Orders module and Orders blotter changes in the following ways to indicate that your order is suspended: o The order s status changes from Active to Suspended. o The SUSPEND button changes to the RESUME button. The order is suspended and Renesource Capital FX Professional stops matching your order against incoming rates. If your order is a displayed order, your price is pulled from other market participants' trading screens. Click RESUME to resume matching.

180 5.3 Trading Modules 180 To resume matching of a specific suspended order: In the Orders module or the Orders blotter, click the suspended order s RESUME button before the order expires. Renesource Capital FX Professional resumes matching your order against incoming rates. Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders If you have the proper permissions, you can quickly fill the open amount of any stop or limit order with a FILL@MKT button in the Order module s order list, in the Orders blotter, or from an order notification popup window. If you are a chief dealer with the correct permissions, you can also fill orders submitted by other users in your Orders blotter. For active, working orders, Renesource Capital FX Professional cancels the order and then submits a new market order with top of book (sweep the market) execution for the remaining balance. If the filled order is a component order of a linked order chain, then all of the remaining component orders of the linked order chain are cancelled. For inactive, expired orders, Renesource Capital FX Professional simply submits a new market order for the remaining balance. You define a separate pip range for market orders submitted when you click a FILL@MKT button (Fill at Mkt Range). See Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market on page 125. To fill the open amount of an order: 1. In the Orders module list or Orders blotter, choose the order that you want to fill immediately. 2. Click the order s FILL@MKT button. The original order is cancelled and your new market order appears in the order list. If the filled order is a component order of a linked order chain, then all of the remaining component orders of the linked order chain are cancelled. If you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional to show order expiration notifications, you can also fill the order with the FILL@MKT button in the popup window. For more information about the orders that fill the remaining balance, see the following: Market range per currency pair: Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market on page 125 Market order type: Market Orders on page 188 GTC time in force: Time in Force on page 184 Orders Overview When you submit an order in Renesource Capital FX Professional, you effectively make a price in the market instead of taking a price from a provider. Even when you take a specific provider s price, your trade request is entered as an order to ensure that your liquidity needs are fulfilled. If you can submit displayed orders, you actually make a price in the market that other market participants can see and hit. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185 for more information. NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions.

181 5.3 Trading Modules 181 You can also upload orders into Renesource Capital FX Professional from a file. See Importing Orders on page 72 for details. Order Characteristics on page 181 Order Types on page 181 Order Persistence on page 183 Order Characteristics Orders are distinguished by the following characteristics: Execution trigger: At what price are trades executed against your order? See Order Trigger Types on page 183. Time in force: How long is your order open and tradable? See Time in Force on page 184. Visibility: Who sees the orders you submit? See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Execution type: How is your order matched with prices? Do you take only the order price or better, or are you expecting an average price or a range of acceptable prices? See Execution Types Described on page 114. Order Types The following table lists the order types that you can submit from the modules: Table 5-1 Order Types Order Type Limit ( Limit Orders on page 188) o Displayed ( Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185) Limit ( Limit Orders on page 188) o Hidden ( Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185) Time in Force ( Time in Force on page 184) DAY GTC GTT DAY GTC GTT Submitted With Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Quick Orders buttons ( Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page 45) Hidden orders are submitted with zero show size. Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Quick Orders buttons ( Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page 45)

182 5.3 Trading Modules 182 Order Type Limit with VWAP execution ( Limit Orders on page 188) o Displayed ( Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185) Limit with VWAP execution ( Limit Orders on page 188) o Hidden ( Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185) Stop (hidden only, Stop Orders on page 189) Market (hidden and displayed, Market Orders on page 188) Market with VWAP execution (hidden and displayed, Market Orders on page 188) Time in Force ( Time in Force on page 184) DAY GTC GTT DAY GTC GTT DAY GTC DAY GTC GTT DAY GTC GTT Submitted With Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) FX Board, Full Book modules: when execution range is zero ( Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Quick Orders buttons ( Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page 45) Hidden orders are submitted with zero show size. Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) FX Board, Full Book modules: when execution range is zero ( Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124) Quick Orders buttons ( Submitting Orders with Quick Order Buttons in the Trading Modules on page 45) Orders module( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Market orders have an execution range of zero. Hidden orders are submitted with zero display size. Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Market orders have an execution range of zero. Hidden orders are submitted with zero show size. Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) FX Board, Full Book modules when execution range is greater than zero ( Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189)

183 5.3 Trading Modules 183 Order Type Market range (hidden and displayed, Market Orders on page 188) Market range with VWAP execution (hidden and displayed, Market Orders on page 188) Linked (hidden and displayed, Linked Orders on page 187) o OCO o TP/SL Time in Force ( Time in Force on page 184) DAY GTC GTT DAY GTC GTT DAY GTC GTT Submitted With Market range orders have an execution range greater than zero. Hidden orders are submitted with zero display size. Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Market range orders have an execution range greater than zero. Hidden orders are submitted with zero show size. Orders module ( Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42) FX Board, Full Book modules when execution range is greater than zero ( Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124) Advanced Orders module ( The Advanced Orders Module on page 189) Submit with: Advanced Orders module ( Submitting Linked Orders on page 47) Orders module or Orders blotter ( Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48) Positions blotter ( Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94) Administer in the Orders module ( The Orders Module on page 168) and Orders blotter ( The Orders Blotter on page 69). Order Persistence If your connection to the FX Grid is configured to enable order persistence, then limit, stop, and market orders remain active and working until they are filled or they expire even if you log out, reconnect, exit, or if you are disconnected from the FX Grid. If order persistence is not enabled, then all active orders are cancelled in these circumstances. Order Trigger Types An order s trigger determines if and when trades are executed against the order. The following table compares the order trigger types in Renesource Capital FX Professional:

184 5.3 Trading Modules 184 Table 5-1 Order Trigger Types Compared Comparison Limit (LMT) Market (MKT) Stop (SL) At what price are trades executed against the order? Can you submit from the Orders module (see The Orders Module on page 168) Can you submit from the FX Board and Full Book modules? (see The FX Board Module on page 154, The Full Book Module on page 160) What time-in-force methods apply? (see Time in Force on page 184) What execution methods apply? Top of book: At the order rate or better VWAP: According to VWAP rules ( Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115) Executed within a range of pips defined by you until the order is filled or liquidity is exhausted: Top of book: At the best market price VWAP: According to VWAP rules ( Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115) Yes Yes Yes All price taking in the Full Book module is submitted as limit orders. Orders module: DAY, GTC, or GTT (see The Orders Module on page 168) FX Board and Full Book modules: DAY, GTC, or GTT (see The FX Board Module on page 154 and The Full Book Module on page 160) All price taking in the FX Board module is submitted as market orders with VWAP execution. Orders module: DAY, GTC, or GTT (see The Orders Module on page 168) FX Board and Full Book modules: DAY, GTC, or GTT (see The FX Board Module on page 154 and The Full Book Module on page 160) VWAP Top of Book VWAP Sweep the Market Trades are executed when the market rate crosses the threshold set by the order s trigger rate, either the bid or the offer rate. No Orders module: GTC (SL and TSL) or DAY (SL only) FX Board and Full Book modules: Not applicable Top of Book Sweep the Market (default) Time in Force An order s time in force determines when trades can be executed against your orders: Day: Your order is executable until the end of the trading day unless cancelled by you or filled. Good till Cancelled (GTC): Orders are executable until cancelled by you or filled. Good till Time (GTT): Orders are executable until they expire, are cancelled by you, or are filled. Any remaining unfilled balance at expiry is cancelled.

185 5.3 Trading Modules 185 If your trading system is configured for persistent orders, your orders stay active when you log out. If persistent orders functionality is not enabled, then the time in force is overridden and orders are cancelled by the system when you log out. See Order Persistence on page 183 for more information. The following table compares the two types of time in force in Renesource Capital FX Professional: Table 5-1 Time in Force Methods Compared Comparison DAY Good till Time (GTT) How long is your order open and tradable? What order types can be submitted with the time in force? Can you submit from the Orders module (see The Orders Module on page 168)? Can you submit from the FX Board and Full Book modules? (see The FX Board Module on page 154, The Full Book Module on page 160) From the moment your order is accepted by the system until it expires at the end of the trading day, is filled, or is cancelled by a trading user Limit Orders on page 188 Market Orders on page 188 Stop Orders on page 189 Linked Orders on page 187 From the moment your order is accepted by the system until it expires, is filled, or is cancelled by a trading user The minimum expiry time for GTT orders is one second. Limit Orders on page 188 Market Orders on page 188 Linked Orders on page 187 Yes Yes Yes Good till Cancelled (GTC) From the moment your order is accepted by the system until it is filled or cancelled by a trading user Limit Orders on page 188 Market Orders on page 188 Stop Orders on page 189 Linked Orders on page 187 You set the default TIF for the trading modules( Setting the Time in Force for the Trading Modules on page 119). Displayed and Hidden Orders The majority of the limit and market orders that you submit in Renesource Capital FX Professional are displayed to all organizations with which you have a liquidity-provider-to-customer relationship. NOTE: You can submit limit and market orders as displayed orders. Stop orders are always hidden orders. Unlike hidden orders, which are filled by Renesource Capital FX Professional s order matching system from incoming prices, displayed orders are filled both by crossing against incoming prices and by other market participants hitting your order. Displayed and Hidden Orders Compared on page 186 Displayed Orders Behavior on page 186

186 5.3 Trading Modules 186 Setting Up Relationships for Displayed Orders on page 186 Displayed and Hidden Orders Compared The following table highlights the significant differences between hidden and displayed orders: Table 5-1 Displayed and Hidden Orders Compared Comparison Hidden Orders Displayed Orders Who can submit the order? Who sees the order? How do I submit the order? How is the order filled? What order types apply? (see Orders Overview on page 180) How is the order shown in the Full Book module? Any Renesource Capital FX Professional user with permission to submit orders Just the user who submitted the order and chief dealer users of the same organization When the default display size is set to zero (see Setting the Default Display Size for Orders on page 122): o Taking prices in the FX o Board, Full Book modules Covering a position in the Positions blotter (see Covering Your Open Positions on page 94) With the Orders module: Submit orders with zero display size. Renesource Capital FX Professional crosses the order against incoming streaming prices. Limit Stop Market Your organization name in red text. Users with liquidity-provider-to-customer relationships with counterparties. See Setting Up Relationships for Displayed Orders on page 186. All counterparties with which you have a liquidityprovider-to-customer relationship When the default display size is greater than zero (see Setting the Default Display Size for Orders on page 122): o Taking prices in the FX Board, Full Book o modules Covering a position in the Positions blotter (see Covering Your Open Positions on page 94) With the Orders module: Submit orders with a display size greater than zero. Other market participants hit your order and Renesource Capital FX Professional crosses the order against incoming streaming prices. Limit and market orders only Your organization name in brackets and red text. Setting Up Relationships for Displayed Orders To submit displayed orders, you must have a liquidity-provider-to-customer relationship with the organizations that will see your liquidity. To establish these relationships, contact support (Help > Contact Integral Support). Displayed Orders Behavior When you submit a displayed order, it appears in the Full Book module with your organization s name in brackets and red text. Hidden orders are displayed in red text.

187 5.3 Trading Modules 187 Displayed orders are automatically crossed against all existing orders and quotes. Until your displayed order is completely filled, you can cancel it. See Canceling Orders on page 173 for more details. If communication with the order host is lost, all of your displayed orders are automatically pulled. Linked Orders NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. Linked orders consist of two or more component orders that are linked by a contingency into an order chain. If one component order of the linked order chain is matched, the other component orders are changed according to their contingency. The linked orders may be of various order types. Contingency Types Renesource Capital FX Professional supports the following types of contingency: One Cancels the Other (OCO): If one order in the order chain is filled, then all the other orders in the chain are cancelled. One Updates the Other (OUO, Proportional): This contingency type applies to TP/SL orders only. See Take Profit/Stop Loss (TP/SL) Orders on page 187. If one order in the order chain is filled, then the size of all the other orders in the chain is reduced by a relative amount. For example, if a component order is filled by 50% of its total size, all other orders in the chain are reduced by 50%. Submitting Linked Orders You construct linked orders with the Advanced Orders module, adding component orders to the module s list. When the component orders are ready, you submit them all at once and then administer the components in the Orders module. See Submitting Linked Orders on page 47. The component orders can be limit orders and stop orders with any time in force. See Limit Orders on page 188, Stop Orders on page 189, and Time in Force on page 184 You can link new orders to existing active orders. See Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48. You can submit hidden or displayed component orders as parts of a linked order chain. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Take Profit/Stop Loss (TP/SL) Orders A take profit/stop loss (TP/SL) order is a special type of linked order that consists exactly two component orders: A limit order that allows you to take profit if the market moves in your favor on a position A stop order that protects you if the market moves against your position You can submit TP/SL orders directly from the Advanced Orders module and for your positions from the Positions blotter and the Orders module. See Placing TP/SL Orders for Your Positions on page 94. All views of the Positions blotter include TP/SL buttons that allow you to quickly

188 5.3 Trading Modules 188 place TP/SL orders for your positions. Filled and partially filled orders in the Orders module list also include a TP/SL button. For most linked orders, you can suspend and resume individual component orders without affected the other orders in the order chain. However, for TP/SL orders, when you suspend or resume one component order, the other component order is suspended or resumed as well. See Suspending and Resuming Orders on page 179. The only valid contingency type for TP/SL orders is OUO (Proportional). See Linked Orders on page 187 for information about contingency types. Limit Orders NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. A limit order is active and tradable from the moment you submit it. See Order Trigger Types on page 183. You can submit limit orders with the following execution methods: Top of book: Your order is matched against prices that equal or better the order rate. VWAP: Your order is matched according to VWAP rules. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. The limit orders that you submit can be good till cancelled (GTC), good till time (GTT), or DAY orders. See Time in Force on page 184. When you take a price from the FX Board module and the execution range is zero, your request to trade is submitted as a limit VWAP order. See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124. When you take a price from the Full Book module and the execution range is zero, your request to trade is submitted as a limit order with top-of-book execution. See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124. You can also submit limit orders from the Orders module See Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42. Limit orders can be hidden or displayed. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Market Orders NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. You use market orders to ensure immediate execution. Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to submit two types of market orders: Market: Trades are executed against the order at market rates at the top of the book until the order is filled or cancelled. Market range: You define an execution range of pips. Trades are executed against the order within the execution range until the order is filled or cancelled. For market range orders, you can choose from the following execution types:

189 5.3 Trading Modules 189 VWAP/Sweep: The order is matched with all prices in the book within the pip range according to VWAP rules until the order is filled or cancelled. See Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) on page 115. Top of Book: The order is matched against the top of the book and within the pip range until the order is filled or cancelled. Sweep: The order is matched with all prices in the book within the pip range until the order is filled or cancelled. You define separate pip ranges for market orders submitted from the trading modules (Range) and market orders submitted when you click a FILL@MKT button (Fill at Mkt Range). See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page 124 and Setting the Execution Range for Fill at Market on page 125. You submit market and market range orders from the Orders module and when you take a price from the FX Board module. See Choosing the Order Type by Currency Pair and Size on page 123. You can submit hidden or displayed market orders. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Market orders can be good till cancelled (GTC), good till time (GTT), or DAY orders. See Time in Force on page 184. You can also fill the remaining balance of active orders with a market order. See Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180. Stop Orders NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. Also, you need the proper user permissions to submit a bid stop order with a bid trigger rate or an offer stop order with an offer trigger rate. Stop orders allow you to go long (bid stop) or short (offer stop) relative to the current market price. A stop order is active from the moment you submit it, but is kept in a pending state. Trades are executed against your order only when the best market rate, either the bid or offer, crosses the threshold of your order s trigger rate, either the bid rate or the offer rate. See Order Trigger Types on page 183. When triggered, your order is matched with top-of-book prices until filled. You can submit stop orders only from the Orders module. See Submitting an Order from the Orders Module on page 42. You can submit only hidden stop orders. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Stop orders can be good till cancelled (GTC) or DAY orders. See Time in Force on page The Advanced Orders Module The Advanced Orders module allows you to submit linked orders. Linked orders consist of two or more component orders that are linked by a contingency into an order chain. If one component order of the linked order chain is matched, the other component orders are changed according to their contingency.

190 5.3 Trading Modules 190 You construct linked orders with the Advanced Orders module, adding component orders to the list in the module. When the component orders are ready, you submit them all at once and then administer the order chain and the individual linked orders in the Orders module. You can also submit individual, unlinked orders with the settings in the module. Advanced Orders Module Components on page 190 Submitting Linked Orders on page 47 Cancelling Linked Orders on page 193 Figure 5-1 Advanced Orders Module Advanced Orders Module Components The Advanced Orders module consists of the following components:

191 5.3 Trading Modules 191 Figure 5-1 Advanced Orders Module Components

192 5.3 Trading Modules 192 Table 5-1 Advanced Orders Module Components Item Description 1 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. 2 Current market prices for reference. You can submit linked orders even when market prices are not available. 3 Buy/Sell drop-down list: Choose to submit a buy or sell order. 4 Type drop-down list: Choose the order type: Limit Orders (LMT): See Limit Orders on page 188. Stop Orders (STOP): See Stop Orders on page 189. Take Profit/Stop Loss (TP/SL) Orders (TP/SL): Adds both a limit and a stop component. See Take Profit/Stop Loss (TP/SL) Orders on page 187. Market Orders (MKT): Submit as an individual order only. Not a valid order type for linked orders. See Market Orders on page 188. NOTE: The types of orders that you can submit depend on your user permissions. If you choose to submit a stop order or a TP/SL order, the Stop Price and Trigger entry tools activate. If you choose to submit a market order, the Range checkbox activates. You can submit a market order only as an individual order and not as a component of a linked order chain. 5 Order Amount field: The total order size of the component order. 6 Dealt currency toggle button: Click to choose to trade the base or term currency. The button changes color to indicate that you are dealing the term currency. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This button is hidden for gold and silver trading. The maximum order size is converted when trading the term currency. See Setting the Maximum Size for Price Taking and Orders on page Show Amount field: The display size of a displayed order. Use to submit iceberg orders and hidden orders. For displayed/iceberg orders, enter an amount that you want users to see. If you leave this field blank, the entire size of your order is revealed. For hidden orders, enter 0 (zero). Grayed out and inactive if you do not have a connection to an order host. See Setting the Default Display Size for Orders on page 122 for more information about display sizes and Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185 for information about displayed orders. 8 Limit Price field: The limit price of the component order. Only active if you choose LMT or TP/SL from the Type drop-down list. 9 Range checkbox and field: Only active when you choose MKT from the Type drop-down list. Check the checkbox to override the default execution range. See Setting the Execution Range for Market Orders on page Stop Price field: Only active when you choose STOP from the Type drop-down list. The stop price of the order. 11 Trigger drop-down list: Only active when you choose STOP from the Type drop-down list. The rate threshold at which trades are done against the order. Choose either the bid or offer rate as the stop trigger rate. See Order Trigger Types on page 183.

193 5.3 Trading Modules 193 Item Description 13 Start Time checkbox: Check to activate the drop-down list and choose when the order begins matching: Start Now: Matching begins immediately after you submit the order. Start In: A field appears that allows you to set a relative time. Matching begins in the number of seconds/minutes/hours after you submit the order. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. Start At: Two fields appear for you to set an absolute time, one allowing you to enter a time of day and the other allowing you to choose a number of days after the current trading day. Matching begins at the date and time that you specify. Until matching begins, the order status is DELAYED. 14 TIF drop-down list: Choose the time in force to apply to a component order. TIF field: If you choose GTT, the field activates and you can enter an expiry time in seconds. See Time in Force on page Contingency drop-down list: For linked orders, specifies the contingency relationship of the orders in the list. OCO (One Cancels the Other): If one order in the order chain is filled, then all the other orders in the chain are cancelled. One Updates the Other (OUO, Proportional): This contingency type applies to TP/SL orders only. If one order in the order chain is filled, then the size of all the other orders in the chain is reduced by a relative amount. For example, if a component order is filled by 50% of its total size, all other orders in the chain are reduced by 50%. 16 Add button: Enters the current order specifications into the list as a component order. 17 A component order in the list. 18 A component order in the list with an order verification warning. The warning appears after you attempt to submit a linked order and it fails verification. Hover your mouse pointer over the warning symbol ( ) to read the text of the warning. You cannot submit a linked order with a warning on any component order. You must either remove the failed component order by clicking its Remove button or, if applicable, ignore the warning by checking the Ignore and continue checkbox. 19 Remove All button: Clears all component orders from the list. 20 Submit button: Submits the orders in the list. 22 The value date of the market prices. See Show the Value Date of Prices on page Module tear off button ( / ): Click to detach the module from the trading screen and to reattach. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227. Module settings button ( ): Click to access module settings. Cancelling Linked Orders With linked orders, you can choose to cancel individual component orders or the entire order chain and all of its associated orders. NOTE: If you cancel an individual component order, the other component orders remain active and tradable. Cancelling an Individual Component Order You can cancel individual component orders from the Orders module and the Orders blotter.

194 5.3 Trading Modules 194 To cancel an individual component order from the Order module, click the OFF button for the order in the Orders module list: Figure 5-1 Orders Module: Cancelling an Individual Component Order Only order # is cancelled. The other order remains active and tradable. To cancel individual component orders from the Orders blotter, click the order s OFF button in the blotter. Figure 5-2 Orders Blotter: Cancelling an Individual Component Order Only order # is cancelled. The other order remains active and tradable. Cancelling All Orders of a Linked Order Chain You can cancel all orders associated with the linked order chain from the Orders module and the Orders blotter. To cancel all orders in the chain from the Orders module, mouse over the OFF button next to the Link ID number in any component order. Figure 5-3 Orders Module: Cancelling All Orders of a Linked Order Chain

195 5.3 Trading Modules 195 The button expands to show the link ID, clarifying that the link and all of its orders in the chain are cancelled when you click the button. Figure 5-4 Orders Module: Cancelling All Orders of a Linked Order Chain (Expanded Button) All orders associated with Link # are cancelled (both orders # and # ). To cancel individual component orders from the Orders blotter, click the order s OFF button in the blotter. Figure 5-5 Orders Blotter: Cancelling All Orders of a Linked Order Chain All orders associated with Link # are cancelled (both orders # and # ) The Sales Dealer Module Sales dealers trade on behalf of organizations other than their own. The Sales Dealer module provides a single interface to trade both RFS and ESP. NOTE: The Sales Dealer module replaces the RFS module for sales dealer users. Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to open multiple Sales Dealer modules at a time. You can open the module in several ways: o Select File > New > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Select Modules > Sales Dealer from the menu. o Click the Sales Dealer button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). You can also detach the module from the trading screen. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 for details. Sales Dealer Module Components (ESP) on page 197

196 5.3 Trading Modules 196 Sales Dealer Module Components (RFS) on page 199 Trading ESP from the Sales Dealer Module on page 29 Trading RFS from the Sales Dealer Module on page 37 Figure 5-1 Sales Dealer Module in ESP Mode

197 5.3 Trading Modules 197 Figure 5-2 Sales Dealer Module in RFS Mode with Swap Prices Sales Dealer Module Components (ESP) You can do the following in the Sales Dealer module in ESP mode: Take ESP spot prices ( Trading ESP from the Sales Dealer Module on page 29) Switch to RFS mode ( Trading RFS from the Sales Dealer Module on page 37) Select the dealt currency (see item 8 ) Enter or select an amount to trade (see item 9 ) The value date and amount components change depending on the trade type that you choose. For example, if you choose to trade spot ESP or RFS, the value date, far value date and far amount components are inactivated because they do not apply. The following image shows the Sales Dealer module with streaming prices for a swap request.

198 5.3 Trading Modules 198 Figure 5-1 Sales Dealer Module Components in ESP Mode

199 5.3 Trading Modules 199 Table 5-1 Sales Dealer Module Components in ESP Mode Item Description 1 Pricing mode buttons: Click ESP for ESP spot trading and RFS for RFS trading. The available tools in the module change according to the pricing method you choose. 2 Trade type drop-down list: Choose the trade type of your request. Other components in the currency pair group activate or inactivate based on the trade type that you choose. 3 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. 4 On Behalf of Organization drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other organizations and you have the correct permissions. Choose the organization that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page On Behalf of Account drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other accounts and you have the correct permissions. Choose the account that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page Tenor drop-down list, value date field, and calendar chooser: Inactivated for ESP spot trading. 7 Direction drop-down list: Inactivated. ESP spot pricing is always two-way. 8 Dealt currency drop-down list: Choose the base or term currency to trade. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This drop-down list is inactivated for metals trading. 9 Amount field: The amount of your request. Shows the default amount and lets you to enter a new amount. See Entering Amounts on page 57 and Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page Sell button: Click to sell at the displayed price. 11 Buy button: Click to buy at the displayed price. 12 Offer price showing the details of the price 13 Spread tools: For sales dealer users trading on behalf of another organization, these tools allow you to customize the spreads on the trade. 14 Settlement Instructions field: Enter any special instructions or notes in this field. Check the Remember checkbox to save your settlement instructions for reuse. If this checkbox is unchecked, any text in the Settlement Instructions field is deleted when you close the module or when you log out. 15 Tear Off button ( / ): Click to detach or attach the module. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page View settings button: Click to open a settings window for the currency pair group or to bring all modules to the front. See Managing ESP Price Subscriptions by Liquidity Provider on page 137 and Bringing All Detached Modules to the Front on page 227. Sales Dealer Module Components (RFS) You can do the following in the Sales Dealer module in RFS mode: Submit a request for stream and take prices in multiple currency pairs ( Trading RFS from the Sales Dealer Module on page 37) Switch to ESP mode ( Trading ESP from the Sales Dealer Module on page 29) Choose the trade type (see item 2 )

200 5.3 Trading Modules 200 Enter a tenor or value date (see items 6 and 7 ) Select the dealt currency (see item 9 ) Enter or select an amount to trade (see item 10 ) The value date and amount components change depending on the trade type that you choose. For example, if you choose to trade spot ESP or RFS, the value date, far value date and far amount components are inactivated because they do not apply. The following image shows the Sales Dealer module with streaming prices for a swap request. Figure 5-1 Sales Dealer Module Components in RFS Mode

201 5.3 Trading Modules 201 Table 5-1 Sales Dealer Module Components in RFS Mode Item Description 1 Pricing mode buttons: Click ESP for ESP spot trading and RFS for RFS trading. The available tools in the module change according to the pricing method you choose. 2 Trade type drop-down list: Choose the trade type of your request. Other components in the module activate or inactivate depending on the trade type that you choose. 3 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. 4 On Behalf of Organization drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other organizations and you have the correct permissions. Choose the organization that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page On Behalf of Account drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other accounts and you have the correct permissions. Choose the account that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page Tenor drop-down list: Choose a default tenor or enter a tenor. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59. This component is active when you choose SW (swap) or OR (outright) from the trade type dropdown list. 7 Broken date fields and calendar choosers: Enter a broken date or click the chooser button ( ) and choose a date. See Broken Dates on page 60. These components are active when you choose OR (outright) or SW (swap) from the trade type drop-down list. 8 Direction drop-down list: Choose to submit a buy, sell, or two-way request. 9 Dealt currency drop-down lists: Choose the base or term currency to trade. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This drop-down list is inactivated for metals trading. 10 Amount fields: The amount of your request. Shows the default amount and lets you to enter a new amount. Spot and outright requests include one field. Swap requests include fields for the near and far legs. See Entering Amounts on page 57 and Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page Matched checkbox: Only visible when you choose SW (swap) from the trade type drop-down list. When checked, use the near leg amount field to edit both near and far legs. When unchecked, you can edit the near and far sizes independently for a mismatched swap. 12 Sell button: Click to sell at the displayed price. 13 Buy button: Click to buy at the displayed price. 14 Mid price 15 RFS swap offer price showing the details of the price 16 Spread tools: For sales dealer users trading on behalf of another organization, these tools allow you to customize the spreads on the trade. SP: (for all trade types) Spot spread OR: (for outright trades) Forward points spread NP: (for swaps) Near-leg forward points spread FP: (for swaps) Far-leg forward points spread 17 Additional Instructions field: Enter any special instructions or notes in this field. Check the Remember checkbox to save your settlement instructions for reuse. If this checkbox is unchecked, any text in the Additional Instructions field is deleted when you close the module or when you log out.

202 5.3 Trading Modules 202 Item Description 18 Get Price/Cancel toggle button: Click Get Price to submit your RFS request. Click Cancel to withdraw your RFS before it expires. The expiry countdown timer is shown in red numbers. See Trading from the RFS Module on page For outrights, swaps, and NDFs, a Material Economic Terms link opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system. 20 Tear Off button ( / ): Click to detach or attach the module. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page View settings button: Click to open a settings window for the currency pair group or to bring all modules to the front. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127 and Bringing All Detached Modules to the Front on page 227. Sales Dealer Module Keyboard Shortcuts Task Execute trade at the currently selected price from the RFS module. The focus must be on the bid/offer price button, not on any other component. Navigate through the module components vertically. Navigate through the module components horizontally. Navigate through all of the module components. Key Enter Up/down arrow keys Left/right arrow keys Tab/Shift+Tab The RFS Module The RFS module allows you to submit a request for a stream (RFS) of prices in a currency pair from several liquidity providers and then take the best price from the stream. You can submit a request for spot, outright, and swap streams. You usually request streams in currency pairs other than those included for ESP trading in the FX Board and Full Book modules and for trade types other than spot. Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to have one RFS module open in the trading screen at a time. You can open the module in several ways: o Select File > New > RFS from the menu. o Select Modules > RFS from the menu. o Click the RFS button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). You can also detach the module from the trading screen. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 for details.

203 5.3 Trading Modules 203 Figure 5-1 RFS Module The RFS Full Book module is linked to the RFS module. When you select a currency pair in the RFS module, the RFS Full Book module automatically displays the depth of book for the selected currency pair as long as only one RFS Full Book module is open. RFS Module Components You can do the following in the RFS module: Submit a request for stream and take prices in multiple currency pairs ( Trading from the RFS Module on page 30) Choose the trade type (see item 2 ) Enter a tenor or value date (see items 5 and 6 ) Select the dealt currency (see item 8 ) Enter or select an amount to trade (see item 9 ) The value date and amount components change depending on the trade type that you choose. For example, if you choose spot, the value date, far value date and far amount components are inactivated because they do not apply. The following image shows the RFS module with streaming prices for a swap request.

204 5.3 Trading Modules 204 Figure 5-1 RFS Module Components

205 5.3 Trading Modules 205 Table 5-1 RFS Module Components Item Description 1 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. 2 Trade type drop-down list: Choose the trade type of your request. Other components in the currency pair group activate or inactivate based on the trade type that you choose. 3 On Behalf of Organization drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other organizations and you have the correct permissions. Choose the organization that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page On Behalf of Account drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other accounts and you have the correct permissions. Choose the account that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page Tenor drop-down list: Choose a default tenor or enter a tenor. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59. This component is active when you choose SW (swap) or OR (outright) from the trade type drop-down list. 6 Broken date field and calendar chooser: Enter a broken date or click the chooser button ( ) and choose a date. See Broken Dates on page 60. These components are active when you choose OR (outright) or SW (swap) from the trade type drop-down list. 7 Direction drop-down list: If you have the appropriate permissions, you can submit a buy, sell, or two-way request. 8 Dealt currency drop-down list: Choose the base or term currency to trade. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This drop-down list is inactivated for metals trading. 9 Amount field: The amount of your request. Spot and outright requests include one field. Swap requests include fields for the near and far legs. Shows the default amount and lets you to enter a new amount. See Entering Amounts on page 57 and Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page Matched checkbox: Only visible when you choose SW (swap) from the trade type drop-down list. When checked, use the near leg amount field to edit both near and far legs. When unchecked, you can edit the near and far sizes independently for a mismatched swap. 11 Sell button: Click to sell at the displayed price. 12 Buy button: Click to buy at the displayed price. 13 Mid price 14 RFS swap offer price showing the details of the price 15 Spread tools: For sales dealer users trading on behalf of another organization, these tools allow you to customize the spreads on the trade. SP: (for all trade types) Spot spread OR: (for outright trades) Forward points spread NP: (for swaps) Near-leg forward points spread FP: (for swaps) Far-leg forward points spread 16 Additional Instructions field: Enter any special instructions or notes in this field.

206 5.3 Trading Modules 206 Item Description 17 Remember checkbox: Check this checkbox to save your settlement instructions for reuse. If this checkbox is unchecked, any text in the Settlement Instructions field is deleted when you close the module or when you log out. 18 Get Price/Cancel toggle button: Click Get Price to submit your RFS request. Click Cancel to withdraw your RFS before it expires. The expiry countdown timer is shown in red numbers. See Trading from the RFS Module on page For outrights, swaps, and NDFs, a Material Economic Terms link opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system. 20 Tear Off button ( / ): Click to detach or attach the module. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page View settings button: Click to open a settings window for the currency pair group or to bring all modules to the front. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page The RFS Full Book Module The RFS Full Book module shows the full depth of book for RFS streams in a specific currency pair from all the liquidity providers who responded positively to your request. Figure 5-1 RFS Full Book Module Link to RFS Module The RFS Full Book and RFS modules are linked. As long as only one RFS Full Book module is open, it automatically displays the depth of book for the currency pair selected in the RFS module.

207 5.3 Trading Modules 207 Opening Multiple RFS Full Book Modules You can open multiple RFS Full Book modules to maintain streams for multiple currency pairs simultaneously. You can open multiple RFS Full Book modules in several ways: Select File > New > RFS Full Book from the menu. Select Modules > RFS Full Book from the menu. Click the RFS Full Book button in the toolbar (see Toolbar on page 229). Click the view settings button for the currency pair in the RFS module ( ). Managing RFS Full Book Modules You can detach modules from the trading screen with the Tear Off toggle button ( ). See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227. Sorting Prices You can choose to sort the prices in the depth of book according to best price or according to liquidity provider. See Sorting Prices in the RFS Full Book Module on page 210. RFS Full Book Module Components RFS Full Book module shows the depth of book for the streams that you have received from liquidity providers for a currency pair. The module contains user interface components allow you to: Submit a request for stream and take prices for a single currency pair ( Take Price Buttons in the RFS Full Book Module on page 210) Choose the trade type (see item 1 ) Enter a tenor or value date (see item 5 and 6 ) Select the dealt currency (see item 8 ) Enter or select an amount to trade (see item 9 ) The components change in appearance to indicate application focus as you navigate through the user interface with your mouse or keyboard. See Application Focus on page 228. The following image shows the RFS module with both streaming prices and active request entry components. In actual use, the request entry components are inactive and grayed-out when you are receiving RFS prices.

208 5.3 Trading Modules 208 Figure 5-1 RFS Full Book Module Components

209 5.3 Trading Modules 209 Table 5-1 RFS Full Book Module Components Item Description 1 Trade type drop-down list: Choose the trade type of your request. Other components in the currency pair group activate or inactivate based on the trade type that you choose. 2 Currency pair combo box: Choose a currency pair from the drop-down list or type it in the field. The currency pair completes automatically as you type. 3 On Behalf of Organization drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other organizations and you have the correct permissions. Choose the organization that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page On Behalf of Account drop-down list: This list only appears if your organization has been configured to trade on behalf of other accounts and you have the correct permissions. Choose the account that you want to trade on behalf of. See Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page Tenor drop-down list: Choose a default tenor or enter a tenor. See Entering Dates and Tenors on page 59. This component is active when you choose SW (swap) or OR (outright) from the trade type drop-down list. 6 Broken date field and calendar chooser: Enter a broken date or click the chooser button ( ) and choose a date. See Broken Dates on page 60. These components are active when you choose OR (outright) or SW (swap) from the trade type drop-down list. 7 Direction drop-down list: If you have the appropriate permissions, you can submit a buy, sell, or two-way request. 8 Dealt currency drop-down list: Choose the base or term currency to trade. See Showing Buttons to Trade the Term Currency on page 110. This drop-down list is inactivated for metals trading. 9 Amount field: The amount of your request. Spot and outright requests include one field. Swap requests include fields for the near and far legs. Shows the default amount and lets you to enter a new amount. See Entering Amounts on page 57 and Defining Default Sizes for the Trading Modules on page Matched checkbox: Only visible when you choose SW (swap) from the trade type dropdown list. When checked, use the near leg amount field to edit both near and far legs. When unchecked, you can edit the near and far sizes independently for a mismatched swap. 11 Get Price/Cancel toggle button: Click Get Price to submit your RFS request. Click Cancel to withdraw your RFS before it expires. See Take Price Buttons in the RFS Full Book Module on page For outrights, swaps, and NDFs, a Material Economic Terms link opens a browser window with the MET public page as configured for your system. 13 Expiry timer. See Setting the Default RFS Expiry Time on page Top of Book/Full Book toggle button: Show just the top-of-book prices or the full book. See Showing the Full Book in the RFS Full Book Module on page Mid price 16 The top of the book 17 The depth of book. You can configure the number of entries. See Setting the Number of Prices in the Full Book and RFS Full Book Modules on page 120.

210 5.3 Trading Modules 210 Item Description 18 Tear Off button ( / ): Click to detach or attach the module. See Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page View settings button: Click to open a settings window for the currency pair group or to bring all modules to the front. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. Take Price Buttons in the RFS Full Book Module The take price buttons, shown below in red for emphasis, let you take RFS prices for the selected currency pair. Depending on how you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional, you single-click or double-click these buttons to take the price for the amount shown. See Choosing Single-Click or Double-Click Price Taking on page 118 for more details. Figure 5-1 Take Price Buttons Sorting Prices in the RFS Full Book Module You can choose to sort the prices in the depth of book according to best price (the default value) or according to liquidity provider. To sort the prices in the RFS Full Book module by best price: 1. Right-click an RFS Full Book module showing prices or click the module settings button ( ). 2. Click Sort in the context menu to place a check next to it. The streams in the module update to show the top of the book. Swap prices are sorted by swap points. To sort the prices in the RFS Full Book module by provider: 1. Right-click an RFS Full Book module showing prices or click the module settings button ( ). 2. Click Sort in the context menu to remove the check next to it.

211 5.4 Blotter Module Components 211 The streams in the module update to show prices in the provider order that you have configured. See Managing RFS Liquidity Providers on page 127. Showing the Full Book in the RFS Full Book Module You can collapse the depth of book to show only the top of the book and to better manage your screen real estate. To collapse and expand the depth of book in the RFS Full Book module, click the Top of Book/Full Book toggle button in the module ( / ). 5.4 Blotter Module Components Renesource Capital FX Professional provides blotters so that you can oversee and analyze trading activity. Figure 5-1 Blotter Module Components

212 5.4 Blotter Module Components 212 Table 5-1 Blotter Module Components Item Description 1 Tabs that you click to access the various Blotter: Orders tab (see The Orders Blotter on page 69) Positions tab (see The Positions Blotter on page 78) Done Trades tab (may include an Outstanding Trades blotter, see The Done Trades Blotter on page 64) Messages tab (see The Messages Blotter on page 97) Exceptions tab (see The Exceptions Blotter on page 98) 2 Find field: Enter text to search for matching items (see Searching Blotter Contents on page 103) 3 Clear button: Click to clear search criteria and show all items (see Searching Blotter Contents on page 103) 4 Column Filters Off button ( ): Click to clear all column filters and show all items allowed by the Find field, the Period drop-down list, and the View drop-down list. Only appears when one or more columns are filtered (see Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103). 5 Column sort arrow: Click to toggle sorting of the column (see Sorting Blotter Contents on page 104) 6 The number of unread items in the blotter (see Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142) 7 Done Trades blotter only: Net position/average price for selected trades and Include New Trades checkbox (see Calculating the Net Position and Average Price for a Currency Pair on page 66) 8 Column filter arrow: Click to filter items in the list by a data value in the column (see Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103) 9 Report button (see Generating a Report of Blotter Items on page 101) 10 Print button (see Printing Blotter Items on page 102) 11 CSV Download button (see Downloading Blotter Items to a CSV File on page 105) 12 Import Draft Orders button (see Importing Orders on page 72) 13 Period drop-down list to determine the time range of items displayed in the table (see Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104) 14 View drop-down list. Depending on your permissions, this list may be inactive (see Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105). 15 Refresh button (see Refreshing the Blotters on page 101) 16 Minimize/Restore toggle button (see Minimizing/Restoring the Blotter Module and Showing Hidden Blotter Tools on page 99). As you resize the Renesource Capital FX Professional screen and Blotter tools such as the Period drop-down list are hidden, this button changes to the Blotter Tools button ( ). Click the button to open a menu that contains the Blotter tools that are hidden. 17 Tear Off button: Click to detach the module from the main trading screen (see Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227) 18 SUSPEND ALL and RESUME ALL buttons (see Suspending and Resuming Orders on page 179) 19 The period over which the spot MTM P/L amount is calculated (see Changing the Time Period of Items Displayed in the Blotter on page 104) 20 Connectivity status indicators (see Connectivity Status on page 230)

213 5.4 Blotter Module Components 213 Item Description 21 Exception indicator: Notifies you of exceptions, such as pending trades. Click the indicator to open the Exceptions blotter (see The Exceptions Blotter on page 98). 22 Blotter update status indicator: Changes to an update spinner ( ) to indicate that the blotter is updating. 23 For the Orders blotter only, filter drop-down list to filter orders by status (see Show Orders by Status on page 71) Done Trades Blotter Columns The Done Trades blotter contains a table of the following information for each trade event. You can configure the Done Trades blotter to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. Table 5-1 Done Trades Columns Name Trade ID Order ID Trade Type Trade Date Tenor Fixing Date Value Date Execution Time Description The trade ID generated by the trading system The order ID generated by Renesource Capital FX Professional. For ESP trades, this shows the order ID. This column is empty for RFS trades. The trade type of the trade. You can filter the Done Trades blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The date on which you conducted the trade The tenor of the trade. Blank if an explicit date was entered. The fixing date for NDF trades The date that both parties of a transaction agree to exchange payments. Also referred as the maturity date. The time in your time zone when the trade was verified Maker/Taker Whether the user was a maker or taker of the trade Buy/Sell CCY Pair Whether the order is a buy or sell order from your perspective. The currency pair of the trade. You can filter the Done Trades blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. Base Amount The amount of the trade in the base currency Term Amount Rate Forward Points Swap Points Organization Account The amount of the trade in the term currency The rate at which the trade was executed The forward points of the trade, if any The swap points of the trade, if any The organization for which the trade is done The account to which the trade is booked

214 5.4 Blotter Module Components 214 Name Trader CPTY Stream CPTY Account CPTY Trade ID Spot Rate Market Spot Rate Market Rate Market Forward Points External Request ID Customer Customer Order ID Customer Trade ID Description The Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade. You can filter the Done Trades blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The counterparty with which the trade was done. You can filter the Done Trades blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. If you receive anonymous streams, this is the stream provider names so that you can associate the trade counterparty and stream provider. The counterparty account (legal entity) with which the trade was done. The ID of the trade in the counterparty s system The spot rate on the trade. The unspread spot rate from the market. This column is available to broker users only. For spot trades, this is the unspread spot rate. For outright and swap trades, this is the unspread spot rate plus the unspread forward points. This column is available to broker users only. The unspread forward points from the market. This column is available to broker users only. The ID of the trade that resulted from a request in a trading system other than Renesource Capital FX Professional. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page 145. The ID of the customer on whose behalf the trade was done. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the Done Trades blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page 145. The ID of the trade s originating order in the customer s system. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the Done Trades blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page 145. The ID of the trade in the customer s system. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the Done Trades blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page Trade Ticket Data The Trade Ticket window that you open from the Done Trades Blotter shows the details of a trade for the following trade types. See The Done Trades Blotter on page 64 for more information about the blotter. Spot: ESP Table 5-1 ESP Spot Trade Ticket Data Name Description Organization The organization of the Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade Account The account to which the trade is booked User The Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade

215 5.4 Blotter Module Components 215 Name Order ID Trade ID Trade Date Value Date Execution Date/Time Account Buys Account Sells Spot Rate Price Improvement Maker/Taker Counterparty Counterparty Account Counterparty ID Description The ID of the RFS request that resulted in this trade The trade ID generated by the trading system The date on which you conducted the trade The date that both parties of a transaction agree to exchange payments. Also referred as the maturity date. The date and time in your time zone on which the trade was verified The base currency and the amount booked to the account. The dealt currency and the amount booked to the account. The amount displayed here uses the amount precision defined in the FX Grid. The trading rate The price improvement in pips over the price you requested, if any, passed on to you by the liquidity provider or broker Whether the user was a maker or taker of the trade The other organization or party with whom the exchange is being transacted The counterparty account to which the trade is booked The counterparty ID of the trade Spot: RFS Table 5-2 RFS Spot Trade Ticket Data Name Organization Account User Trade ID Trade Date Value Date Execution Date/Time Account Buys Account Sells Spot Rate Description The organization of the Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The account to which the trade is booked The Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The trade ID generated by the trading system The date on which you conducted the trade The date that both parties of a transaction agree to exchange payments. Also referred as the maturity date. The date and time in your time zone on which the trade was verified The base currency and the amount booked to the account. The dealt currency and the amount booked to the account. The amount displayed here uses the amount precision defined in the FX Grid. The trading rate

216 5.4 Blotter Module Components 216 Name Price Improvement Maker/Taker Counterparty Counterparty Account Counterparty ID Description The price improvement in pips over the price you requested, if any, passed on to you by the liquidity provider or broker Whether the user was a maker or taker of the trade The other organization or party with whom the exchange is being transacted The counterparty account to which the trade is booked The counterparty ID of the trade Outright Table 5-3 Outright Trade Ticket Data Name Trade Type Organization Account Trade ID User Trade Date Tenor Value Date Execution Date/Time Maker/Taker Account Buys Account Sells CCY Pair Spot Rate Fwd Points Rate Counterparty Counterparty Account Counterparty ID Description The trade type The organization of the Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The account to which the trade is booked The trade s ID The Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The date on which you conducted the trade The tenor. Blank if a broken date was entered. The date that both parties of a transaction agree to exchange payments. Also referred as the maturity date. The date and time in your time zone on which the trade was verified Whether the user was a maker or taker of the trade The base currency and the amount booked to the account. The dealt currency and the amount booked to the account. The amount displayed here uses the amount precision defined in the FX Grid. The currency pair of the trade The spot rate The forward points The trading rate The other organization or party with whom the exchange is being transacted The counterparty account to which the trade is booked The counterparty ID of the trade

217 5.4 Blotter Module Components 217 Swap Table 5-4 Swap Trade Ticket Data Name Trade Type Organization Account Trade ID User Trade Date Execution Date/Time Maker/Taker Counterparty Counterparty Account Counterparty ID Spot Rate Swap Points CCY Pair Description The trade type The organization of the Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The account to which the trade is booked The trade s ID The Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The date on which you conducted the trade The date and time in your time zone on which the trade was verified Whether the user was a maker or taker of the trade The other organization or party with whom the exchange is being transacted The counterparty account to which the trade is booked The counterparty ID of the trade The spot rate on the near leg The swap points on the far leg The currency pair of the trade The following information is given for the near and far legs of the swap: Tenor Value Date Fwd Points Rate Account Buys Account Sells The tenor The date that both parties of a transaction agree to exchange payments. Also referred as the maturity date. The forward points The trading rate The base currency and the amount booked to the account The dealt currency and the amount booked to the account. The amount displayed here uses the amount precision defined in the FX Grid. NDF Table 5-5 NDF Trade Ticket Data Name Description Trade Type The trade type Organization The organization of the Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade

218 5.4 Blotter Module Components 218 Name Account Trade ID User Trade Date Tenor Fixing Date Value Date Execution Date/Time Maker/Taker Account Buys Account Sells CCY Pair Spot Rate Fwd Points Rate Counterparty Counterparty Account Counterparty ID Description The account to which the trade is booked The trade s ID The Renesource Capital FX Professional user who initiated the trade The date on which you conducted the trade The tenor. Blank if an explicit value date was entered. The fixing date of the trade The date that both parties of a transaction agree to exchange payments. Also referred as the maturity date. The date and time in your time zone on which the trade was verified Whether the user was a maker or taker of the trade The base currency and the amount booked to the account. The dealt currency and the amount booked to the account. The amount displayed here uses the amount precision defined in the FX Grid. The currency pair of the trade The spot rate The forward points The trading rate The other organization or party with whom the exchange is being transacted The counterparty account to which the trade is booked The counterparty ID of the trade Orders Blotter Columns The Orders blotter contains a table of the following information for each order. You can configure the blotter to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. Table 5-1 Orders Blotter Columns Column Name Order ID Trade ID Description The order ID. If the order has underlying trades, an expand/collapse button appears next to the order ID ( / ). Click the button to show or hide the underlying trades. This column is empty for RFS trades. The ID of an underlying trade. This column is does not apply to orders. To see these IDs, you must click the expand button ( ) to show the order s trades.

219 5.4 Blotter Module Components 219 Column Name Status Suspend Cancel Amend Copy Submission Time Trader Type Description The current status of the order: New: No trade has been executed against the order. Partial: A part of the order has been filled. Filled: The order is completely filled. Cancelled: The order has been cancelled by a trader user. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. For active orders, this column displays a SUSPEND/RESUME toggle button that allows you to suspend and resume matching on the order. See Suspending and Resuming Orders on page 179. For inactive orders (filled, cancelled, expired), this column is empty. An OFF button is displayed in this column. The button is active only for new or partially filled orders. Clicking the button cancels the open amount. Users with permission to view trades for their organization can cancel orders submitted by other users. See Viewing Your Organization s Trades and Events on page 105. For active, unfilled orders, this column displays an AMEND button that allows you to amend the order. See Amending Orders: Cancel/Replace on page 174. For inactive orders (filled, cancelled, expired), this column is empty. For active stop and limit orders, this column displays a FILL@MKT button that allows you to fill the remaining amount of the order as a market order. See Filling Remaining Order Amounts as Market Orders on page 180. For inactive orders (filled, cancelled, expired), this column is empty. For all orders, this column displays a COPY button that allows you to use the order as a template to submit a new order. See Copying Orders on page 46. The date and time of the order submission. You can set the time format using the Settings window (Tools > Settings). See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 for details. The trader user who submitted this order. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The type of order: LMT: Limit Orders on page 188 SL: Stop Orders on page 189 MKT: Market Orders on page 188 This column does not apply to underlying trades and is blank when you expand the order to see the trades. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. TIF The order s time in force (TIF, see Time in Force on page 184): DAY GTC GTT You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. Expiry Strategy Mkt Range The expiry time of the order. Applicable to GTT orders. The order s execution type: VWAP: VWAP execution MKT: Market order The market range in pips for a market order. Not applicable to other order types.

220 5.4 Blotter Module Components 220 Column Name Buy/Sell CCY Pair Order Amount Dealt CCY Limit Rate Market Rate Trigger Rate Fill Rate Filled Amount Unfilled Amount Mkt Spread CPTY Contingency Cancel Link Link Description Whether the order is a buy or sell order from your perspective. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The currency pair of the order. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The amount for which the order was placed. For an underlying trade, this column shows the trade amount. The currency in which the order was placed. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. The rate at which the order was placed, either the rate manually entered by the user in the Orders module or the rate at which the user took the price from the trading module (FX Board, Full Book). For market orders, depending on your permissions, this can be the unadjusted price or the price including the market range adjustment. This column does not apply to trades. The market rate of prices taken from the trading modules. The market rate does not include the execution range. For comparison, the limit rate of an order is the market rate plus the execution range. In most cases, the market rate is the rate clicked on in the trading modules. However, if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional to show prices with the execution range in the FX Board module, the Market Rate column still shows the market rate without the execution range, not the rate that was clicked on. The trigger rate of a stop order. The average rate at which the order was filled. For underlying trades record, this column shows the rate at which the trade was executed. The amount of the order that has been filled so far. For trades, this column shows the trade amount. The amount yet to be filled (the difference between the dealt amount and filled amount). This column does not apply to trades. This column only applies to active orders. The difference between the limit rate and the opposite market rate, bid limit against market offer and offer limit against market bid. The ID of the counterparty with which a trade was executed. If the entire order has been met by a single counterparty, the column shows the counterparty ID. If more than one counterparty executed trades against the order, the columns shows Multiple. You can filter the blotter by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103. If the order is a component order of a linked order chain, the type of contingency on the order. See Linked Orders on page 187. For active linked orders, this column displays an OFF LINK button that allows you to cancel all orders in a linked order chain. See Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48. For inactive orders (filled, cancelled, expired), this column is empty. For active, unfilled orders, this column displays a LINK button that allows you to link the order to a new order. See Linking an Active Order to a New Order on page 48. For inactive orders (filled, cancelled, expired), this column is empty. Link ID For linked orders, the ID of the linked order chain. See Linked Orders on page 187. Organization Account For sales dealers trading on behalf of another organization, this is the ID of the organization for which the order was submitted. The account for which the order was submitted

221 5.4 Blotter Module Components 221 Column Name Last Modified Show Amount Description The time when the order was last modified either by a user or by the system. For example, when a user first places an order, the last modified time is the same as the submission time. When a trade is executed against the order, the last modified time the verification time of that trade. For trades, this column shows the time that the trade was verified. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page 145. The display size of the order. See display size. This column is applicable only to displayed orders and not to trades. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page 145. Hidden/Displayed Whether the order is a hidden order or a displayed order. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. This column does not apply to trades. This column is not displayed by default. You must add this column to the blotter. See Adding Blotter Columns on page 145. You can filter the table by blotter in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page Order Summary Data The Order Summary window that you open from the The Orders Blotter on page 69 shows the following details of an order and its associated trades: Table 5-1 Order Summary Data Column Name Order ID Submission Time Trader Type Strategy Mkt Range Buy/Sell CCY Pair Order Amount Dealt CCY Filled Amount Description The order ID. This field is empty for RFS trades. The date and time of the order submission. You can set the time format using the Settings window (Tools > Settings). See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 for details. The trader user who submitted this order The type of order: LMT: Limit Orders on page 188 STOP: Stop Orders on page 189 MKT: Market Orders on page 188 The order s execution type: VWAP: VWAP execution MKT: Market execution If blank, this indicates top of book execution. See Execution Types Described on page 114. The market range in pips for a market order. Not applicable to other order types. Whether the order is a buy or sell order from your perspective The currency pair of the order The amount for which the order was placed The currency in which the order was placed The amount of the order that has been filled so far

222 5.4 Blotter Module Components 222 Column Name Limit Rate Market Rate Average Rate Description The rate at which the order was placed, either the rate manually entered by the user in the Orders module or the rate at which the user took the price from the trading module (FX Board, Full Book). This column does not apply to trades. The market rate of prices taken from the trading modules. The market rate does not include the execution range. For comparison, the limit rate of an order is the market rate plus the execution range. In most cases, the market rate is the rate clicked on in the trading modules. However, if you have configured Renesource Capital FX Professional to show prices with the execution range in the FX Board module, the Market Rate column still shows the market rate without the execution range, not the rate that was clicked on. The average rate at which the order was filled Time in Force The order s time in force (TIF, see Time in Force on page 184): DAY GTC GTT Expiry Status Show Amount For orders with a time in force of GTT, this is the time before expiry. The current status of the order: New: No trade has been executed against the order. Partial: A part of the order has been filled. Filled: The order is completely filled. Cancelled: The order has been cancelled by a trader user. The display size of the order. See display size. This is applicable only to displayed orders. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Hidden/Display Whether the order is a hidden order or a displayed order. See Displayed and Hidden Orders on page 185. Contingency If the order is a component order of a linked order chain, the type of contingency on the order. See Linked Orders on page 187. Link ID For linked orders, the ID of the linked order chain. See Linked Orders on page 187. Trade Details table The details of any trades executed against the order Positions Blotter Columns The information shown in the Positions blotter depends on the grouping you choose from the Group By drop-down list in the blotter. For more information, see Viewing Positions in the Blotter on page 79. NOTE: If you trade on behalf of other organizations, the Positions blotter does not consider these trades when calculating your positions. Summary View on page 80 Counterparty View on page 86 Trader View on page 88 Account View on page 90

223 5.4 Blotter Module Components Messages Blotter Columns The Messages blotter contains a table of the following information for each trading event. You can configure the blotter to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. Table 5-1 Messages Blotter Columns Column Name Order ID Trade ID Description The ID of your price taking or order submission. A single order ID may encompass multiple trading events with multiple trade IDs. The ID of a trade. Multiple trade IDs may be generated as the trade changes in status from the original pending trade to done, cancelled, or rejected. Time Stamp The time of the trading event. You can set the time format using the Settings window (Tools > Settings). See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 for details. Event Account Trader A brief description of the trading event. You can filter the table by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 The account with which this event is associated The user whose action prompted the message. You can filter the table by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 Maker/Taker Whether the user was a maker or a taker Message A detailed description of the trading event Messages Blotter Font Colors Renesource Capital FX Professional uses colors to indicate the various message types in the Messages blotter. Messages displayed in bold font are unread messages. See Keeping Track of Trades and Messages on page 142. Figure 5-1 Messages Blotter Font Colors

224 5.4 Blotter Module Components 224 Table 5-1 Messages Blotter Font Colors Item Description 1 Black font for informational messages: Order submitted Order matching Order cancelled 2 Green font for trade verified messages 3 Red font for error and warning messages: Order submission failed Order cancellation failed Order matching failed RFS submission failed Trade rejected for reasons other than delayed confirmation (failed credit check, price not available, etc.) Exceptions Blotter Columns The Exceptions blotter contains a table of the following information for each exception. You can configure the blotter to show only specific columns in the order you choose. See Configuring Blotter Columns on page 144 for details. Table 5-1 Exceptions Blotter Columns Column Name Order ID Trade ID Description The ID of your price taking or order submission. A single order ID may encompass multiple trading events with multiple trade IDs. The ID of a trade associated with the exception. Time Stamp The time of the exception. You can set the time format using the Settings window (Tools > Settings). See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109 for details. Event Account Trader A brief description of the exception. You can filter the table by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 The account with which this exception is associated The user whose action prompted the exception. You can filter the table by values in this column. See Filtering Blotter Contents by Column on page 103 Maker/Taker Whether the user was a maker or a taker Message A detailed description of the exception

225 5.5 Common Tools and Tasks Common Tools and Tasks The following topics describe common tools and behavior in the Renesource Capital FX Professional user interface and the basic tasks for interacting with Renesource Capital FX Professional. Trading Screen Layouts on page 225 Locking the Trading Screen on page 226 Disabling the Trading Screen on page 226 Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen on page 227 Bringing All Detached Modules to the Front on page 227 Application Focus on page 228 Price Movement Indicators on page 228 Toolbar on page 229 Status Bar on page 230 Connectivity Status on page Trading Screen Layouts You can customize the trading screen to suit your needs. By default, Renesource Capital FX Professional saves the screen layout when you log out. When you log in again, Renesource Capital FX Professional uses the layout from your previous trading session. Renesource Capital FX Professional also allows you to save your layouts to files so that you can easily change the trading screen as your needs change. To save the trading screen layout: 1. Select File > Save Layout As. A Save As dialog appears. 2. Enter a name for your layout in the File name: field. By default, the layout files are saved with the file name extension LCF. 3. Click Save. To load a previously saved layout: 1. Select File > Load Layout. An Open dialog appears. 2. Select the layout you want to open. 3. Click Open. To load a recently loaded layout: 1. Select File > Recent Layouts.

226 5.5 Common Tools and Tasks Select a layout from the list Locking the Trading Screen Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to lock the trading screen, presenting a read only view that updates with incoming prices but does not allow you to trade. Locking the trading screen prevents inadvertent trading when you are working in other applications or when you are away from your desk. You can lock the trading explicitly by clicking the Lock Panels/Unlock Panels toggle button in the toolbar or set an idle time after which the trading screen is locked. The modules in the trading screen change color to indicate that it they are locked. You can still use the tools in the Blotter module when the screen has been locked. See Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64 for details. The OFF ALL and OFF ALL ORG buttons in the toolbar are always active allowing you to withdraw all active orders. You can also require a password to unlock the trading screen. Password protection applies to both to the Lock Panels button and to the idle time-out. The idle time is counted by any mouse or key activity in the trading screen, not just by trading activity. See Configuring Screen Locking on page 109 for more information. Locking the trading screen is similar to disabling the trading screen, with the following important differences: Table 5-1 Locking the Trading Screen Compared to Disabling the Trading Screen Locking No activity allowed. Modules are completely locked. Can be configured to lock automatically after a period of inactivity and to require a password to unlock. Disabling Activity allowed in modules (for example, change amounts, configure execution types). Only trading disabled. No configuration. For more information about locking, see Disabling the Trading Screen on page Disabling the Trading Screen Renesource Capital FX Professional allows you to disable trading and enter a safe mode that allows you to make price subscriptions, view prices, and cancel orders, but does not allow trading. Disabling trading prevents inadvertent trading when you are working in other applications, but still allows you to perform important business tasks. To disable trading, click the Disable Trading toggle button in the toolbar.

227 5.5 Common Tools and Tasks 227 Disabling the trading screen is similar to locking the trading screen, with the following important differences: Table 5-1 Disabling the Trading Screen Compared to Locking the Trading Screen Disabling Activity allowed in modules (for example, change amounts, configure execution types). Only trading disabled. No configuration. Locking No activity allowed. Modules are completely locked. Can be configured to lock automatically after a period of inactivity and to require a password to unlock. For more information about locking, see Locking the Trading Screen on page 226. When trading is disabled, the title bars of all modules display [Trading Disabled]. To enable trading, click the Enable Trading toggle button in the toolbar. You can still use the tools in the Blotter module when trading has been disabled. See Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64 for details. The OFF ALL and OFF ALL ORG buttons in the toolbar are also active allowing you to withdraw all active orders Detaching Modules from the Main Trading Screen You can detach the modules from the Renesource Capital FX Professional trading screen into separate windows to better manage your screen real estate. To detach a module, click the Tear Off toggle button ( ) in the button bar at the top of the module. The module is removed from the main trading screen and displayed in a separate window. If you want a detached panel to always display on top of all windows and applications on your desktop, right-click the title bar of the detached panel and select Always On Top from the context menu. To reattach a module, click the Tear Off toggle button ( ) in the button bar of the detached module. The window closes and the module is opened in the trading screen. If you cannot see the Tear Off toggle button in the Blotter module, click the More button ( ). See Minimizing/Restoring the Blotter Module and Showing Hidden Blotter Tools on page 99 for details Bringing All Detached Modules to the Front You can detach the modules from the Renesource Capital FX Professional trading screen into separate windows to better manage your screen real estate.

228 5.5 Common Tools and Tasks 228 To more easily keep track of your detached modules, you can bring all detached modules to the front by doing one of the following: Select Modules > Bring All Modules to Front from the main menu. Click the module settings button ( ) in any module or right-click the top of any module and choose Bring All Modules to Front from the context menu Application Focus When you use keys or the mouse to navigate through the Renesource Capital FX Professional user interface, elements of the interface change to indicate where your actions apply. This is called a change of focus in the application. For example, in the FX Board module, when a price is not in focus, it looks like this: Figure 5-1 Price Not in Focus When you tab to the price or hover your mouse pointer over the price, the button changes to indicate your focus on the price: Figure 5-2 Price in Focus If you press the Enter key or click or double-click with the mouse, a trade is done for the price in focus Price Movement Indicators The trading modules contain tradable prices that update automatically from a streaming price feeds. You can configure the modules to show an arrow that indicates the price s movement when the prices change. When the price moves up, a white, upward-pointing arrow appears. When the price moves down, a red, downward-pointing arrow appears. To show or hide the indicators, see Showing Price Movement Indicators on page 111.

229 5.5 Common Tools and Tasks 229 Figure 5-1 Bid Price Moved Up and Offer Price Moved Down with Latest Update Toolbar The toolbar along the top of the trading screen and under the menu provides buttons for quick access to the following modules and functionality. The buttons you see depend on your permissions: Figure 5-1 Renesource Capital FX Professional Toolbar for Traders Figure 5-2 Renesource Capital FX Professional Toolbar for Sales Dealers Figure 5-3 Renesource Capital FX Professional Toolbar FX Board: The FX Board Module on page 154 Full Book: The Full Book Module on page 160 Orders: The Orders Module on page 168 Advanced Orders: The Advanced Orders Module on page 189 Blotter: Monitoring Trading Activity on page 64 RFS: The RFS Module on page 202 Sales Dealer: The Sales Dealer Module RFS Full Book: The RFS Full Book Module on page 206 Account Details: The Account Details Module on page 99 Lock Panels: Locking the Trading Screen on page 226 Disable Trading: Disabling the Trading Screen on page 226 Volatile Market: Volatile Market Trading on page 61 Org and Acct drop-down lists: Trading on Behalf of Another Organization or Account on page 62 OFF ALL: Canceling Orders on page 173 OFF ALL ORG: Canceling Orders on page 173

230 5.5 Common Tools and Tasks Status Bar The status bar along the bottom of the trading screen shows the following information: Your organization ID and your user ID The trade date (not the calendar date). You can configure the date format. See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109. The time in your time zone. You can configure the time format. See Setting Formats for Amount, Date, and Time Display on page 109. An NumLock indicator (NUM) that lets you if your keyboard s number pad is active or not Network status indicators (see Connectivity Status on page 230) Connectivity Status Renesource Capital FX Professional gives you a real-time indication of your connectivity to the FX Grid and to individual liquidity providers. Status Indicators on page 230 Indicator Colors on page 231 Status Indicators The network status indicators are in the lower left corner of the application window. Table 5-1 Connectivity Status Indicators Item Description 1 Blotter update status 2 Connection to the FX Grid 3 Connection to liquidity providers 4 Rate updates When you hover your mouse pointer over the liquidity provider or rate update indicator, Renesource Capital FX Professional expands the indicator display to include all streams and their status. To shrink the indicator display, move your mouse pointer from the liquidity provider or rate update indicator.

231 5.6 Renesource Capital FX Professional Keyboard Shortcuts 231 Figure 5-1 Connectivity Status Indicators (Expanded) Indicator Colors The indicators change to the following colors in response to network conditions: The blotter update status indicator changes to an update spinner ( ) to let you know that the blotter is refreshing to show the latest data. Dark green means that connectivity is present. Light green means network activity. Network traffic, such as rate updates, occurs so quickly that the indicators appear to blink. Red means that connectivity has been lost. If you have trading modules open (FX Board, Orders, Full Book) and the indicators remain red, please contact Integral support (Help > Contact Integral Support). Yellow means that connectivity has been lost with one or more, but not all, liquidity providers. Contact Integral support (Help > Contact Integral Support) if this condition persists. 5.6 Renesource Capital FX Professional Keyboard Shortcuts IMPORTANT: To cancel all active orders, press F4. FX Board Module Keyboard Shortcuts on page 232 Full Book Module Keyboard Shortcuts on page 232 RFS Module Keyboard Shortcuts on page 232 RFS Full Book Module Keyboard Shortcuts on page 233 Blotter o Orders Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts on page 233 o Positions Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts on page 233 o Done Trades Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts on page 233 o Messages Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts on page 234 o Exceptions Blotter Keyboard Shortcuts on page 234